Anders Vredin
Macroeconomic Policies
and the Balance
of Payments
AKADEMISK A VHANDLING
som for avliiggande av ekonomie
doktorsexamen vid Handelshogskolan
i Stockholm framliigges till offentlig granskning
fredagen den 11 mars 1988 kllO.i5
i sal Ragnar ahogskolan, Sveaviigen 65
STOCKHOLM 1988
Macroeconomic Policies and the Balance of Payments
The Economic Research Institute at the Stockholm School of Economics
Address: Sveavagen 65, Box 6501, S-113 83 Stockholm, tel 08-736 01 20
Basic Orientation
The Economic Research Institute, at the Stockholm School of Economics
(EFI) is devoted to the scientific study of problems in management science
and economics. It provides research facilities for scholars belonging to these
disciplines, training advanced students in scientific research. The studies to
be carried out by the Institute are chosen on the basis of their expected
scientific value and their relevance to the research programs outlined by the
different sections of the Institute.
Research Divisions:
A
B
C
D
ES
F
G
I
P
S
Work Life Issues and Personnel
Accounting and Managerial Finance
Managerial Economics
Marketing Distribution and Structural Economics
Economic Statistics
Public Administration
Research Program in Policy Sciences
International Economics and Geography
Applied Information Systems
Econonlic Psychology
Economics
Independent Research Programs:
Man and Organization
The Foundation for Distribution Research
Additional information about research in progress and published reports is
described in our project catalogue. The catalogue can be ordered directly
from The Economic Research Institute, Box 6501, S-113 83 Stockholm,
Sweden.
Macroeconomic Policies
and the Balance of
Payments
Anders Vredin
A Dissertation for the Doctor's Degree
in Econonlics
Stockholm School of Economics 1988
© EFI and the author
ISBN 91-7258-250-2
UDK 339.72
339.74
336.748
gotab
Stockholm 1988 87003
Acknowledgements
The papers in this thesis have grown out of different projects
within the monetary policy research group at the stockholm
School of Economics. The work has been carried out under the
guidance of Staffan Viotti, and with financial support from Jan
Wallander's Research Foundation and the Swedish Savings Banks'
Foundation for Economic Research (Sparbankernas Forskningsstiftelse). The members of the group have all, directly or
indirectly, made contributions to this thesis.
My gross debt is largest to Lars Horngren and Peter Englund,
the co-authors of Chapters 3-4 and Chapter 5, respectively.
They have also helped me out in many other respects. I still
believe lowe a larger net debt to Staffan Viotti, for his
indispensable advice on specific questions and his generally
generous attitude. Having my office in room 272 at the Department of Economics, it has been comforting to find the door to
Staffan's room (270) open upon my arrival in the morning, and
to find Lars' door (room 271) open most of the other time.
During my years as a graduate student I have also benefitted
from proximity to Karl Jungenfelt (room 273). Although I have
not taken the opportunity to collaborate with him, Karl's
genuine interest in research, and in the well-being of his
students, has been an important source of stimulation. I am
also grateful to Johan Myhrman, who sparked my interest in
macroeconomics, and who has supported me throughout my graduate
studies.
My interest in international economics, macroeconomics, and
econometrics was much stimulated by a visit to the University
of Minnesota during the academic year 1983-84. I wish to thank
the students and the faculty at the Department of Economics for
their hospitality, and the FUlbright Commission, the Sweden-America Foundation, and Professor John Chipman for making my
visit possible.
Many people have read and made comments on earlier drafts of
the studies in this thesis. In particular I would like to thank
Tom Cooley and Nils Gottfries for their criticism and useful
comments on the first versions of Chapters 4-5. The skillful
research assistance from Marianne Nessen and Ingrid Werner, in
connection with Chapter 4, is also gratefully acknowledged. The
usual caveats apply.
lowe a special debt to Kerstin Niklasson, whose abilities to
cope with the word processing technology and with my messy
manuscripts have made a deep impression on me. Thanks are also
due to Monica Peijne, who has given professional assistance as
well as moral support to Kerstin and me.
Despite all the above-mentioned support, there are times when
one feels that the costs of trying to do research exceed the
benefits. To my wife Bodil, who has patiently shared a larger
part of the costs than of the benefits, I want to express my
gratitude.
stockholm in January, 1988
Anders Vredin
-
i
-
Contents
1.
MACROECONOMIC POLICIES AND THE BALANCE OF PAYMENTS:
BACKGROUND AND SUMMARY
1
1.1
Introduction
1
1.2
Do exchange rates and the balance of
payments matter?
3
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
2.
A stochastic IS-LM framework
The monetary approach to the
balance of payments
Expectations and credibility
The current account
Conclusions
5
11
17
21
24
1.3
Swedish stabilization pOlicy
25
1.4
Summary
32
References
37
CAPITAL MOBILITY AND MONETARY AUTONOMY
43
2.1
Introduction
43
2.2
The conceptual framework
45
2.3
The model
49
2.4
Monetary policy and capital flows
61
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
61
64
69
Imperfect capital mobility
Perfect capital mobility
Policy implications
2.5
Empirical evidence
72
2.6
Summary
78
Appendix
81
References
84
- ii -
3.
THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK PREMIUM: A REVIEW
OF THEORY AND EVIDENCE
89
3.1
Introduction
89
3.2
Theoretical models of the foreign
exchange risk premium
92
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3
Empirical work
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.4
4.
A simple continuous time asset
pricing model
Extensions of the simple model
Implications
Atheoretical tests
Tests of structural asset
pricing models
Concluding comments
93
102
115
117
118
123
133
References
135
THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK PREMIUM
IN A CURRENCY BASKET SYSTEM
139
4.1
Introduction
139
4.2
Characteristics of a currency basket pOlicy
143
4.3
Risk premia in a currency basket system
151
4.4
The data and the formulation of tests
155
4.5
Regression results
163
4.6
Concluding comments
170
References
174
-
5.
iii -
THE CURRENT ACCOUNT, SUPPLY SHOCKS AND
ACCOMMODATIVE FISCAL POLICY
177
5.1
Introduction
177
5.2
The econometric model
183
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.3
Results
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.4
A model of the current account
Vector autoregression methods
Identifying assumptions
184
191
193
196
Data description
The estimated VAR model
Responses to structural shocks
Concluding comments
196
198
202
211
Appendix A:
Data description
214
Appendix B:
Deseasonalization
216
Appendix C:
Tables
218
References
225
- 1 -
1. Macroeconomic Policies and the
Balance of Payments:
Background and Summary*
1.1
INTRODUCTION
This thesis contains a collection of papers which study
different aspects of the relation between macroeconomic
policies and the balance of payments. The latter is normally
defined as the change in the foreign exchange reserves, but the
studies are not restricted to the item "below the line"; the
balances on the current and capital accounts are sometimes in
focus. The macroeconomic policies considered are normally
described as monetary, fiscal, or exchange rate policies.
Institutional factors and empirical regUlarities pertaining to
the Swedish economy are given relatively much attention, while
purely theoretical issues play a minor role.
The studies are focused on two different questions. The first,
which is the common theme of Chapters 2-4, concerns the degree
*
I am indebted to Staffan Viotti, Lars Horngren, Peter
Englund, and Jonas Agell for helpful comments on earlier
drafts.
- 2 -
of sUbstitutability between assets denominated in different
currencies and how asset substitutability affects the scope for
monetary policy in a small open economy like Sweden. The second
question is treated in Chapter 5 and concerns the empirical
evidence on the determinants of the Swedish current account.
The two questions are related, in the sense that they both
concern problems associated with international capital
mobility. However, the separate studies make use of quite
different methods and data, and no attempt is made to present
the results in an integrated theoretical framework.
1
Chapter 2 is focused on the question about the relation between
capital mobility and monetary autonomy. In particular, the role
of the forward foreign exchange market is analyzed in the
context of a simple portfolio balance model, under the
maintained assumption of imperfect substitutability between
domestic and (uncovered) foreign securities. Chapter 3 contains
a review of theoretical and empirical evidence on the degree of
international asset sUbstitutability. Unlike the portfolio
balance model used in Chapter 2, the theoretical models
reviewed in Chapter 3 are based on explicit assumptions about
the optimization problem and the nature of the fundamental
uncertainty that investors face. Empirical tests on spot and
forward exchange rate data for the Swedish krona are presented
in Chapter 4, which also contains a description of the Swedish
currency basket system. Chapter 5, finally, is focused on the
co-movements of the current account and other real aggregates.
A four-variable vector-autoregressive model is estimated and
interpreted.
One purpose of this chapter is to give a summary of the main
results of the thesis. Before summarizing, however, I would
like to present some arguments as to why economists or policy
makers should be concerned with questions of monetary autonomy,
1
See Boothe et al (1985) for a similar approach to
macroeconomic pOlicies and balance of payments problems
in Canada.
-
3 -
balance of payments determination, and international capital
mobility in general. In their review of recent developments in
international monetary economics, Frenkel and Mussa (1985)
argue that balance of payments and exchange rate issues now
"are regarded as important in their own right, rather than as
sUbsidiary concerns of pOlicy management" (p. 680). Since the
work underlying Chapters 2-5 of this thesis has been undertaken
on the assumption that the issues dealt with are of interest
not only "in their own right", another purpose of this chapter
is to provide a background and some motivations for the studies
in question. section 1.2 is thus devoted to the question
whether exchange rates and the balance of payments matter. The
Swedish experiences of stabilization policy under different
exchange rate regimes are discussed in section 1.3. section 1.4
contains the summary of the thesis. 2
1.2
DO EXCHANGE RATES AND THE BALANCE OF PAYMENTS MATTER?
In principle, policy makers may be concerned with the
development of exchange rates and the balance of payments for
two different reasons. First, a given policy may bring about
changes in exchange rates and/or the balance of payments e.g., through private capital movements - that in turn
influence the effectiveness of that policy. Second,
fluctuations in exchange rates and the balance of payments may
initiate changes in policy, to the extent that they are
associated with movements in some target variable.
As a starting point for a discussion of these issues, I will
use a simple stochastic IS-LM model of the options for monetary
policy. The model, which is presented in section 1.2.1, is due
to Henderson (1979, 1984), and is a generalization of Poole's
2
It is not necessary for an understanding of Chapters 2-5 to
read the background material in this chapter. Many - in
fact, most - of the questions raised in this introductory
survey are left unanswered by the subsequent chapters in the
book. A reader who just wants a summary of the main results
is referred to section 1.4.
-
4 -
(1970) analysis to the case of an open economy. Three features
of the model are worth emphasizing. First, assumptions are
chosen so that monetary and exchange rate policies would be
non-neutral, i.e., have real effects, if the economy were
closed. Second, the model is intended to shed light on the
relation between "targets" and "instruments" of macroeconomic
policy. Third, the analysis is confined to a static and short
run perspective where the economy's nominal wealth and, in
particular, expectations are constant and independent of
current policies.
The first and second features make the model suitable for the
purposes of this chapter. In order to focus on the consequences
of international capital mobility for policy-making in an open
economy, it seems natural to make assumptions that ensure that
monetary and exchange rate policies - or, more generally,
financial disturbances - can be transmitted to real variables
in a closed economy.3 More precisely, it is (implicitly)
assumed that nominal wages are less than fully flexible, and
that private decisions are affected by the supply of government
bonds. 4
It is fairly common that problems of monetary and exchange rate
policies are analyzed in terms of models that are partial in
the sense that they treat all real (as opposed to financial)
variables as exogenous. The (monetary) authorities are thus
assumed to have their objectives defined in terms of
"intermediate targets" such as the money stock, foreign
exchange reserves or interest rates, but the mechanisms through
which the effects of monetary policies are transmitted to
"ultimate targets", such as employment or production, are not
modelled. Such an approach permits a more thorough treatment of
strictly financial problems, but cannot, of course, lead to any
3
This is the approach taken by Frenkel and Mussa (1981).
4
See, e.g., Obstfeld (1982) and Stockman (1983) for
discussions about the relevance or irrelevance of monetary
policies in open economies.
- 5 -
conclusions as to why balance of payments and exchange rate
issues may be important for other reasons than "their own
right".
Although the model discussed in section 1.2.1 is a useful
reference model for some purposes, the static and short run
IS-LM framework is clearly insufficient for an analysis of some
important issues of macroeconomic policies and the balance of
payments. Theoretical models which allow wealth, expectations,
etc., to be endogenously determined are thus discussed in
Sections 1.2.2 - 1.2.4.
1.2.1
A stochastic IS-LM framework
Consider the following open-economy IS-LM portfolio-balance
model:
x[y, r, r * s; ux]
M
L[Y,
T= K[Y,
r, r * , S;
(1.1)
0,
Z
u ,
r, r * , S; u Z ,
u1 ]
,
(1.2)
uk] .
(1.3)
The first equation is the condition for equilibrium in the
domestic goods market. Y denotes real national income, rand r *
are the domestic and foreign nominal interest rates, and S is
the exchange rate (units of domestic currency per unit of
foreign currency). The model includes domestic and foreign
goods, which are assumed to be less than perfect SUbstitutes,
and wages are assumed to be less than perfectly flexible in the
short period of time which is considered. Henderson's original
(1984) model is presented in a rational expectations framework,
where variables are expressed in terms of deviations from
expected values, and equilibrium is defined in terms of the
labor market instead of the goods market. For our purposes,
however, (1.1) may be treated as a conventional IS curve. The
- 6 -
money market equilibrium condition (the LM curve) is given by
(1.2), and (1.3) is the equilibrium condition for the domestic
securities market. M is the domestic nominal money stock, and T
denotes private holdings of domestic securities. 5
The nominal exchange rate enters (1.1) because of substitution
as well as wealth effects from changes in the exchange rate on
the domestic and foreign demand for the domestic good. It is
assumed that a depreciation (an increase in S) increases
demand. The presence of S in the asset demand functions in
(1.2) and (1.3) reflects that a change in the current exchange
rate, given the expected future rate, involves a change in the
(expected) relative returns on domestic and foreign assets. An
instantaneous depreciation involves a lower expected rate of
depreciation, a lower demand for foreign securities, and a
correspondingly higher demand for money and domestic
securities. In addition, asset demands may respond to "real
balance" effects associated with a change in the exchange rate.
X
represents a disturbance to the goods market which involves
a change in the demand for the domestic good and a
corresponding (but opposite) change in the demand for the
foreign good. U Z represents a disturbance to the demand for
money which is matched by a corresponding (but opposite)
disturbance to the demand for domestic securities. u 1 (Uk) is a
disturbance to the demand for money (domestic securities) which
is matched by a disturbance to the demand for foreign
securities. Note that important exogenous variables such as
foreign income and price levels, domestic and foreign nominal
wealth, etc. have been suppressed, on the assumption that they
U
5
Elementary textbook models of stabilization policy in open
economies often include a balance-of-payments equilibrium
curve in addition to the IS and LM curves. The instantaneous
equilibrium in Henderson's (1984) model does not require the
trade balance to equal the capital balance, but that there
is equality between the supply of and demand for domestic
securities. The difference between the flow and stock
equilibrium approaches becomes unimportant only in the case
of perfect substitutability between domestic and foreign
securities.
- 7 -
(like r * ) are held, and are expected to be held, constant.
Suppose that the disturbances are not observed when the optimal
pOlicy is to be chosen, and that the objective is to minimize
the variance of output, given the distributions for the u's.
Henderson (1984) distinguishes between two strategies for
monetary policy (fiscal policies are not considered) :
(i)
a "rates constant" policy which involves fixing the
exchange and interest rates, while allowing the monetary
aggregates to be varied in accommodating operations
(interventions) in the markets for domestic and foreign
securities. Under this strategy, (1.1) - (1.3) determine
Y, M and T, given rand S.
(ii)
an "aggregates constant" pOlicy which involves fixing the
monetary aggregates, while allowing the exchange and
interest rates to vary. (1.1) - (1.3) then determine Y,
rand S, given M and T.
It is easily seen that if on~y disturbances to the goods market
are present, an "aggregates constant" policy, which allows r
and S to adjust to the movements in u X , will be the proper
strategy. If, on the other hand, only disturbances to the asset
markets occur, a "rates constant" policy will effectively
insulate the goods market by not allowing rand S to vary. In
the case of disturbances to both goods and asset markets, fixed
exchange and interest rates will be the optimal strategy if
financial disturbances dominate. 6
We may rephrase the question "do
"does it matter whether exchange
and relate some common arguments
exchange rates (see, e.g., Tower
6
exchange rates matter" as
rates are fixed or flexible",
in favor of fixed or flexible
and Willett (1976» to the
Note that pure "rates constant" and "aggregates constant"
policies may, in principle, be dominated by a policy where
one aggregate and one rate (e.g., T and S) are fixed.
- 8 -
above model. It has been argued that a fixed exchange rate
imposes a constraint on stabilization policy, since the
exchange rate cannot be used to correct balance of payments
disequilibria. This argument is based on the (in most cases
implicit) assumptions (i) that balance of payments equilibrium
(a constant level of foreign exchange reserves) is desirable,
(ii) that the benefits of stabilization policy are related to
the number of policy instruments at hand, and (iii) that a
fixed exchange rate policy restricts the monetary authorities'
opportunity set by excluding the use of a potentially important
instrument. In Henderson's (1979, 1984) analysis, in contrast,
the level of reserves does not enter the authorities' objective
function; the maximum number of instruments in the model is
limited to two; and there is need for only one instrument.
Monetary aggregates and exchange and interest rates are
alternative instruments of monetary policy, for which the only
ultimate goal is to stabilize output. It may be optimal to keep
the monetary aggregates constant, and let the exchange rate
vary, or it may not. Constant levels of monetary aggregates (or
flexible exchange rates) have no independent value. It should
also be noted that an aggregates constant policy, where the
exchange rate is fUlly flexible, does not imply that the latter
can be used as a policy tool.
It has also been argued that flexible exchange rates will lead
to higher price level variability and to "vicious circles" of
depreciation and inflation. Henderson (1984) uses a version of
his model (where wages are indexed to the general price level)
to show that for a given level of output variability, price
level variability may be higher under floating than under fixed
rates. This may thus be a disadvantage of a flexible-rates
system, if price stability is a target for pOlicy makers. 7 On
the other hand, an argument in favor of flexible exchange rates
has been that exchange rate flexibility may be a substitute for
7
stabilization of the price level may under certain
conditions be equivalent to output stabilization, although
this does not imply that a flexible exchange rate regime is
necessarily optimal (cf. Flood (1979».
-
9 -
price and wage flexibility. For example, money wage
disturbances may be neutralized by exchange rate movements, so
that "competitiveness" is automatically maintained. 8 In
Henderson's model, exchange rate flexibility may limit the
output (employment) effects of various disturbances, but the
optimal exchange rate policy will depend on which type of
disturbances dominates. As shown by Dornbusch (1976), a
characteristic feature of a sticky-price flexible-exchange-rate
economy may be that the short run behavior of the exchange rate
involves an "overshooting" of the long run equilibrium level.
It should be emphasized that "excessive" variability does not
constitute an argument against a flexible rates system, if it
is associated with a low and desired variability of
employment. 9
A more thorough discussion of the stabilizing properties of
flexible exchange rates is contained in the survey by Marston
(1985). For our purposes, it is particularly noteworthy that
the above model makes clear that the optimal stabilization
policy will depend, among other things, on the degree of
capital mobility or, more precisely, on the degree of
substitutability between domestic and foreign securities. In
particular, if they are perfect sUbstitutes, i and S are
constrained by the uncovered interest parity condition. This
means that the authorities' opportunity set is limited to three
variables, one of which may be chosen as the instrument for
financial policy. without further assumptions it cannot be
determined whether it is optimal, e.g., to peg the exchange
rate rather than the money stock. What can be said is that if
the exchange rate is chosen to be predetermined, neither the
8
If nominal prices and wages were perfectly flexible, nominal
exchange rates might be irrelevant for real variables; see,
e.g., Kareken and Wallace (1981), stockman (1983), and
Corden (1985).
9
Note that flexibility in one price (the exchange rate)
hardly can be expected to compensate for sluggish adjustment
in a larger number of relative prices in goods (and asset)
markets; cf. Chipman (1980).
- 10 -
money stock nor the interest rate can be determined
independently of that choice. 10
The foregoing discussion suggests that exchange rate changes
may be one ingredient in an optimal pOlicy geared at
stabilizing output, and that the optimal exchange rate policy
depends on the degree of capital mobility. In this sense, this
theoretical framework offers some arguments to the effect that
the balance of payments and exchange rates should indeed be
"concerns of policy m~nagementn, just like interest rates and
the money stock. On the other hand, the simple IS-LM model
cannot lend any support to Mundell's (1962) recommendation that
once a fixed exchange rate pOlicy has been chosen, monetary
pOlicy should be directed towards "external balance", i.e., a
constant level of foreign exchange reserves.
In the present framework, it is optimal either to fix the
exchange rate or to let it fluctuate freely. In the latter
("aggregates constant") case M and T are the instruments of
monetary policy, while in the former ("rates constant") case
the exchange and interest rates are the preferred instruments
(to be predetermined by the authorities). In either case, one
instrument can be fixed arbitrarily, while the other is set so
as to minimize the variance of output. Unless domestic and
foreign securities are perfect substitutes, one instrument is
thus redundant in Henderson's (1984) analysis. This means that
the fixed exchange rate/external balance combination is
feasible, although nothing can be said as to why it should be
desirable.
Henderson (1984) shows that in the (perhaps more realistic)
case when the authorities can observe current movements in the
financial variables not chosen as pOlicy instruments, which may
then be labelled "information variables", or "intermediate
10 Boyer (1978b) studies the authorities' optimization
problem in a model where capital is perfectly mobile, but
where the budget deficit may be used as an additional
instrument.
- 11 -
targets", a feedback rule is generally optimal. It may be
optimal to follow a "managed float" pOlicy in which the
monetary aggregates are varied in response to observed
movements in the exchange and interest rates. This argument is
analogous to that of Frenkel and Mussa (1981), who argue that
the exchange rate is a useful "indicator" for monetary policy.
Alternatively, it may be optimal to follow a pOlicy where an
exchange rate instrument is adjusted in response to changes in
monetary aggregates, such as the foreign exchange reserves. It
still remains to be shown why short run balance of payments
equilibrium, in the sense of a constant level of reserves,
should be an optimal intermediate target.
The fact that the foreign exchange reserves position (like the
stability of the price level) does not enter the authorities
objective function in Henderson's (1979, 1984) model does not,
of course, mean that "external balance" generally is an
unimportant concept. On the contrary, policy makers seem to
feel that they are faced with an "external balance constraint".
since this notion is not, apparently, warranted by the IS-LM
model, we will turn to models that take a longer run
perspective on economic policy.
1.2.2
The monetary approach to the balance of payments
It is well known that the combination of international capital
mobility and a fixed exchange rate policy makes the money stock
endogenous. This observation, which can be made from the model
in Section 1.2.1, is also one of the messages of the monetary
approach to the balance of payments. Proponents of the monetary
approach sometimes argue that domestic and foreign securities
can be viewed as perfect substitutes, which - as seen above implies that the money stock is not even controllable (if the
exchange rate is fixed). The most important message, however,
may be summarized in the statement that the balance of payments
·
1S
a mone t ary p h enomenon. 11
11 Cf. Frenkel and Johnson (1976), who summarize the history of
- 12 -
The basic ingredients in the monetary approach to the balance
of payments can be captured by a fixed-exchange-rate
non-stochastic version of the model in the previous section:
y
x[y,r,r*,s,w/s] + Nx[y,r,r*,s,w/s],
(1.4)
(1.5)
T/S = k[y,r,r*,s,w/s].
(1.6)
For future reference, we express the goods market equlibrium
condition (1.4) in terms of total domestic expenditures X(.)
and the trade balance NX(.), and explicitly make clear that
demand is a function of domestic wealth, W, which in turn is
defined as
w
M + T + F,
(1.7)
where F denotes (net) domestic holdings of foreign securities.
The money market and securities market equilibrium conditions
are now expre,ssed in terms of real stocks. It is assumed that
the domestic and foreign price levels are linked through
. power parlty,
.
purchaslng
P
P*
=
=
. are chosen so that
SP * , and unlts
1.
It is further assumed that the monetary authorities let T and S
be predetermined, which means that neither a pure "rates
constant" nor a pure "aggregates constant" is followed.
Monetary pOlicy takes the form of open market operations where
the monetary authorities exchange domestic securities for money
or foreign securities. As noted above, the consequence of
capital mobility and the fixed exchange rate pOlicy is to make
the money stock endogenous. Capital mobility allows the private
agents to exchange domestic money for foreign securities; the
the ideas in the tradition of the monetary approach.
- 13 -
associated excess supply of domestic currency is accommodated
by the central bank at a fixed exchange rate.
The model thus determines the instantaneous equilibrium values
of Y, i, and M. The equilibrium conditions for the goods market
(1.4) and the domestic securities market (1.6) jointly
determine Y and i, while M is recursively determined by the
money market equilibrium condition (1.5).
A crucial point in the monetary approach to the balance of
payments is the central bank's balance sheet, which shows that
the foreign exchange reserves, R, are part of the (base) money
supply:
M = R + T
C
-
J,
(1.8)
where J is the bank's net worth, and TC its holdings of
domestic securities, i.e.,
Tc
where
=
T
- T,
(1.9)
T is the total stock of domestic (government) securities.
Long run equilibrium in this model may be taken to imply that Y
is equal to the full employment level Y, and that the current
account is balanced, i.e., that
- r, r * , S, WIS ] + r *
NX [Y,
F
S
o.
(1.10)
Using (1.5), (1.7) and (1.9) this condition can be written on
reduced form as
- r *,
n [Y,
0,
which determines the long run equilibrium value of W.
(1.11)
- 14 -
Frenkel and Mussa (1985) consider the adjustment to long run
equilibrium under two extreme assumptions about capital
mobility. If there is no capital mobility, the long run
equilibrium levels of rand M will be given by suitably
modified versions of the money market equilibrium condition
(1.5) and the "external balance" condition (1.10):12
(1.12)
(1.13)
In the case of perfect capital mobility, which is here taken to
mean that r
= r *,
. .
. to (1.12) the cond1t10ns
correspondlng
(1.13) determine Wand M and will read
MIS =
I[Y,
n- [-Y, r * ,
r*, S, W/S],
(1.14)
o.
(1.15)
As in the case of no capital mobility, the long run equilibrium
value of M is independent of the central bank's net worth, J.
From the central bank's balance sheet (1.8) it is then obvious
that any change in J will involve a corresponding change in R.
According to Frenkel and Mussa (1985), an essential feature of
the monetary mechanism of balance of payments adjustment is
that "any change in the supply of domestic money demand leads
to an equivalent change in foreign exchange reserves and to a
corresponding cumulative payments surplus (or deficit)" (p.
691). Suppose that there is an increase in the fiat issue of
the central bank, which decreases the bank's net worth, i.e.,
lowers J. From the reasoning above it follows that dR = dJ.
Another, completely analogous, feature of the monetary approach
12 Complete capital immobility here implies that F = 0 (and,
hence, W = M + T), and that r* is not an argument in demand
functions.
- 15 -
to the balance of payments is that "any change in the long-run
equilibrium level of domestic money demand that is not offset
by changes in the domestic assets component of the money supply
ultimately leads to a corresponding change in the foreign
exchange reserve" (Frenkel and Mussa (1985), p. 691). It is in
this sense that "the balance of payments is regarded as a
monetary phenomenon" (Frenkel and Johnson (1976».
The effects of an open market operation that changes T
C
differ
from the "helicopter" operation considered by Frenkel and Mussa
(1985), since the former operation affects private wealth. This
result hinges on the assumption that "Ricardian equivalence"
does not hold (cf. Obstfeld (1982». It should also be noted
that the recursivity of the model breaks down if the monetary
authorities systematically sterilize the movements in R by
offsetting changes in T
C
•
The economy's adjustment towards long
run equilibrium can be prolonged by sterilization, provided
13
that capital is less than perfectly mobile.
If capital is less than perfectly mobile, so that the money
stock is controllable, the question arises whether it should be
manipulated, e.g., in attempts to stabilize output in the short
run. Swoboda (1973) argues that "though monetary pOlicy is
rarely appropriate as a counter-cyclical device and taken by
itself, unless the level of reserves is of no concern, it does
represent a very powerful instrument of balance-of-payments
policy" (p. 258). Following Mundell (1962), Swoboda suggests
that monetary pOlicy should be assigned to external balance and
14
fiscal pOlicy to internal balance.
Frenkel and Johnson (1976)
state that "monetary processes will bring about a cure (for
13 The model with some but less than perfect capital mobility
is more thoroughly discussed in the survey by Marston
(1985). For analyses of sterilization (in the short run as
well as in the long run), see Boyer (1979) and Obstfeld
(1980) •
14 See Boyer (1978a), Henderson (1977), and Marston (1985) for
discussions and references to more recent literature on the
"assignment problem".
- 16 -
balance of payments problems) of some kind - not necessarily
very attractive - unless frustrated by deliberate monetary
policy action" (p. 24, parenthesis added). The message seems to
be that neither systematic sterilization, nor discrete open
market operations, should be undertaken.
When going from the positive conclusion that the balance of
payments is a monetary phenomenon (in the long run) to
normative ideas for (short run) monetary policy, Swoboda and
Frenkel and Johnson obviously presume that the balance of
payments should be of concern to policy makers, and that a
balance of payments deficit (or surplus) constitutes a problem
(for some other reason than its effect on the monetary base). I
believe that this presumption must be based on some of the
following arguments. Corden (1985, Ch. 3) suggests that the
reserves may be used to "provide for emergencies", that there
may be an optimal level of reserves, and that the authorities
may want to stabilize reserves because of costs of adjustment.
At an informal level, the argument is consistent with the
discussion in the previous section. It is natural to think of
the foreign exchange reserves as a buffer which absorbs the
short run fluctuations in money demand (or supply) in a fixed
exchange rate economy. But if there are significant costs
associated with changes in reserves, or with satisfying the
non-negativity restriction, this should be taken into account
when the optimal pOlicy is selected. In effect, the proper
policy may be to let the exchange rate float, rather than to
follow the fixed exchange rate pOlicy analyzed by Mundell
(1962), Swoboda (1973) and others in the tradition of the
monetary approach.
Another argument relies on the assumption of complete capital
immobility, in which case balance of payments deficits
correspond to current account deficits. Mundell (1962)
explicitly states that he "assumed away ••• concern about the
precise composition of the balance of payments" and that the
suggested policy mix therefore may be "desirable only in the
- 17 -
short run" (p. 234n). Mundell is nevertheless criticized by
Williamson (1971), who argues that "there are no circumstances
in which it would be desirable to pursue Mundell's strategy"
(p. 236). An economy's welfare (future consumption
possibilities) is more directly related to its total stock of
foreign assets than to its reserve position, Williamson argues.
He criticizes the ad hoc use of a balance of payments target in
an analysis which is intended to be normative, and suggests
that "an efficient adjustment mechanism must include a means of
adjusting the current account" (p. 237). The current account is
explicitly recognized as an "external balance constraint" in
the monetary approach to the balance of payments, in the sense
that a long run equilibrium is assumed to be characterized by a
zero balance on current account. The important message,
however, is that the monetary mechanism of balance of payments
adjustment is a stable, equilibrating process. The theoretical
framework associated with the monetary approach does not, in
itself, offer any ground for an assertion that the current
account is an important target variable.
Finally, arguments have been made to the effect that the
balance of payments may have a direct influence on exchange
rate expectations. For instance, Swoboda (1973) argues that the
reserve stock should be "large enough relative to disturbances
to finance temporary deficits without causing anticipations of
devaluation" (p. 257).
The next subsection will be devoted to a discussion of the role
of expectations, while the current account as an "external
balance constraint" is discussed in section 1.2.4.
1.2.3
Expectations and credibility
In simple non-stochastic and static IS-LM models, macroeconomic
pOlicy is treated as completely exogenous. Poole (1970) and
Henderson (1979, 1984) consider the problem of selecting
optimal policies when the economy is subjected to stochastic
- 18 -
disturbances. Policy instruments are still predetermined in
these models, if they have to be set before any disturbances
are realized. If, on the other hand, the authorities have some
information about the outcome of the stochastic processes,
e.g., through observations of movements in some "information
variables", feedback rules are generally optimal.
Once pOlicy is made endogenous (and purposeful), it seems very
restrictive to assume private agents' expectations to be
invariant to changes in policy. Since expectations, in turn,
affect equilibrium outcomes, the problems of policy making
become quite complex. For example, if there is some degree of
international capital mobility, international interest rate
differentials will depend on expected changes in exchange
rates. Modern theory teaches that since interest rates via
capital movements in turn affect equilibrium levels of exchange
rates, the latter will depend on current as well as the entire
expected future paths of all exogenous variables which
15
influence asset demands or supplies.
In other words, the
short run behavior of exchange rates in a flexible rates system
will not be independent of long run economic policies. In
analogy, a fixed exchange rate policy is feasible only insofar
as agents expect future monetary and fiscal policies to be
consistent with a constant exchange rate in the long run.
Recent research about the role of expectations in a world of
international capital mobility and rational agents does not
deny that balance of payments and exchange rate issues are
"concerns of policy management", although it stresses that
there is no simple relation between, e.g., monetary policies
15 See, e.g., Obstfeld and Stockman (1985), who define
movements in exchange rates caused by expected future
changes in exogenous variables as "extrinsic" exchange-rate
dynamics. "Intrinsic" dynamics are defined as adjustments
towards long run equilibrium. (The economy may be out of
long run equilibrium because of, e.g., price stickiness or
imperfect information.) It should also be noted that there
are models in which the exchange rate does not depend on
expectations (cf. Lucas (1982».
- 19 -
and the behavior of exchange rates over a given time interval.
The "external balance constraint" that a fixed exchange rate
policy has to satisfy is that no expected excess supply of
money (loss of reserves) at any future date is larger than a
certain maximum level (given by the requirement that the level
of reserves cannot be negative). If this constraint is
violated, one may experience a run on reserves, a "balance of
payments crisis", and an immediate adjustment of the exchange
rate. Expectations about the fiscal and monetary policies that
the authorities will follow after the breakdown will affect
both the timing of the crisis (cf. Obstfe1d (1984»
and the
behavior of important macroeconomic variables between the date
when the crisis is foreseen and that of the eventual
occurrence. Drazen and He1pman (1986) suggest that money stock,
current account and exchange rate movements contain information
about expected future policies.
An important question is how (if) pOlicies gain credibility.
For example, the presence of nominal wage (and other) contracts
may create an ex post incentive for deviations from an ex ante
policy of a fixed exchange rate, since discrete devaluations
(or, more generally, unexpected increases in the price level)
will lower real wages and stimulate employment, raise tax
revenues, etc. In the literature on the credibility issue in
this context, it is often assumed that the government's loss
function (or the social welfare function) contains inflation as
an argument besides unemployment. The ex post incentive to
inflate imposes a real cost on society, since expectations of
inflation will be reflected in nominal wage contracts. A game
between the government and wage earners (or a trade union) may
thus imply that inflation rises, without any gain in terms of
employment. If the game is repeated over time, there is a
trade-off between current employment and future inflation.
Repeated games, on the other hand, open the possibility that
credibility can be established through "reputation".16
16 The literature on the "time-inconsistency" of monetary
policy in a closed economy has been reviewed by, e.g.,
-
20 -
In a closed-economy framework, Rogoff (1985a) shows that the
costs from lack of credibility may be reduced by the
appointment of a central banker who puts more weight to
inflation than the government (and society as a whole), or to
some nominal "intermediary target", such as the money supply.
To my knowledge, this result has not been generalized to an
open economy context, or to the effect that the exchange rate
(or the level of foreign exchange reserves) is a useful target.
Even if such a generalization is possible, it should be noted
that Rogoff's analysis also shows that rigid targeting (an
infinite weight on inflation) is not optimal, since the gain
from reduced inflation is achieved at the cost of higher
variability in employment. In other words, the observations
that expectations are important, and that inflation may reduce
welfare, do not warrant the conclusion that the price level
should be insulated from real shocks.
International cooperation within a fixed exchange rate system
may be beneficial, to the extent that it lowers the costs that
are due to lack of credibility. On the other hand, a fixed
rates system also involves a real cost in the sense that
countries will not be free to choose their preferred level of
inflation taxation (if purchasing power parity is a reasonable
description of the long run relationship between national price
levels). It is also possible that international cooperation
creates new credibility problems. Rogoff (1985b) provides a
theoretical example where a fixed rates system is
17
counterproductive and lowers welfare.
Empirically, it does
not seem as if systems of pegged exchange rates lower the
Cukierman (1986) and Persson (1987). It has been applied to
exchange rate economics by Horn and Persson (1987) and
Andersen and Risager (1987a). These studies offer
game-theoretic analyses of the "vicious circles" argument
against flexible exchange rates.
17 For a brief discussion of the general problems involved, in
a game-theoretic context, see Persson (1987). See also
Kareken and Wallace (1978) for a discussion of the
feasibility of different exchange rates systems.
- 21 -
probability of speculative attacks against an individual
currency; not surprisingly, credibility problems seem to be
more dependent on domestic fiscal and monetary policies than on
official exchange rate targets. For example, Helpman and
Leiderman (1987) interpret the experiences of Israel,
Argentina, Bolivia, and Brazil as indicating that an immediate
reduction of a bUdget deficit is important for a successful
(credible) disinflation policy, whereas the role of exchange
rate policy in this context is not clear. Andersen and Risager
(1987b) argue that the credibility of the Danish government's
exchange rate policy explains the decline in domestic interest
rates 1982-1984. Credibility, in turn, was established first of
all by keeping the exchange rate fixed despite external
disturbances, and by supporting this policy with fiscal and
labor market policies. Although these empirical studies offer
some support for the notion that exchange rate and balance of
payments issues are "concerns of policy management", they do
not offer any clear-cut answers to questions about the
desirability of disinflation or fixed exchange rates, etc.
Before turning to the Swedish experiences of stabilization
policy under different exchange rate regimes, which will be
discussed in section 1.3, I will briefly discuss the role of
the current account as an "external balance constraint" on
stabilization policy.
1.2.4
The current account
In IS-LM.. . analyses the trade balance opens a "leakage" through
which the effects of monetary policy (under a fixed exchange
rate regime) are dampened. To the extent that private capital
movements should be sterilized, monetary policy should also be
concerned with the currency flows that result from net exports
or imports. In the well-known paper by Mundell (1962), however,
it is assumed that policy makers are not only concerned with
internal balance, but also with external balance. Any tendency
towards a currency outflow should thus not be sterilized
-
22 -
through expansive monetary policy, but rather be met by
contractive measures (irrespectively of the composition of the
balance of payments). If no such measures are undertaken,
wealth effects secure that the external imbalance is
self-correcting, according to the monetary approach of the
balance of payments.
When policy makers try to resist demands for more expansionary
pOlicies and attempt to avoid external imbalance in the sense
of (an increase in) a current account deficit, they seem to be
more concerned with the future interest rate burden associated
with an increase in national debt, than with the immediate
"leakage" effects. Furthermore, they do not seem to be
convinced that imbalances will correct themselves. Quite the
contrary, the current account is often explicitly given the
status of a target for stabilization policy. The question is
whether such a policy can be justified.
The authorities' concern over the current account may reflect
that they are concerned about the long run development of
production and consumption, over and above the short run
variability of employment and/or price levels. As pointed out
by, e.g., Williamson (1971) and Persson and Svensson (1987),
the current account in any given year is not a good indicator
of welfare, which is more directly related to the total stock
of (domestic and foreign) assets. For instance, a current
account deficit may increase future consumption possibilities
if it is associated with an increase in the capital stock; and
even if the increase in foreign debt is mainly caused by a
consumption boom, this may be consistent with an optimal
intertemporal allocation of consumption. External balance in
the sense of a zero balance on current account thus does not
seem to be a proper ultimate target for economic policy. 18
18 It is well known that exchange rate changes under certain
conditions are equivalent to tariffs and export subsidies.
Trade liberalization may thus be of limited value if trade
wars through exchange rate policies are permitted.
Williamson (1971) discusses the external balance constraint
-
23 -
Unless capital is perfectly mobile, or "Ricardian equivalence"
holds, private savings and investments will be dependent on the
government's debt management. For a given government bUdget
deficit, there will be less crowding-out effects the more the
foreign debt increases. One may thus argue that the government
should allocate its consumption and investment optimally over
time, after due consideration of crowding-out effects, but not
be particularly concerned with the total pUblic and private
foreign borrowing, i.e., the current account. Corden (1985)
suggests that policy makers should only be concerned with the
government budget deficit and not with the aggregate of
government and private savings and investments. Whether the
current account is useful as an intermediary target thus hinges
on whether it contains some useful information that is not
reflected already in the government budget balance.
As shown by, e.g., Svensson and Razin (1983), the effects on
national savings of a change in the terms of trade are
generally ambiguous; wealth and substitution effects tend to go
in different directions. This is also true for many other
exogenous changes, which would seem to disqualify aggregate
savings as an information variable. It is furthermore true, of
course, that the current account, which equals savings minus
investments, cannot contain more information than these
separate aggregates together (or than total exports and
imports) •
As noted in the previous sUbsection, Drazen and Helpman (1986)
show that expectations about future policies will be reflected
in the current account. This is not to say, however, that
policies geared at the current account can affect expectations
in any useful way. While the development of the current
account, empirically, seems to affect the government's
in this context, and Vinals (1986) suggests that measures
undertaken in order to "improve" the current account may be
rationalized as an attempt to limit the pressures for
protectionist measures.
-
24 -
reputation - in the ordinary sense of the word - no formal
analysis of the mechanisms involved has, to my knowledge, been
conducted.
1.2.5
Conclusions
Why do exchange rates and the balance of payments matter,
according to theoretical open economy models? If conditions for
monetary policy to have real effects are satisfied, exchange
rate and balance of payments issues should indeed matter. At
least, exchange rates are no less "concerns of policy
management" than interest rates or the money stock, as
illustrated by the simple stochastic IS-LM model in section
1.2.1. The exchange rate is one element in a set of potential
instruments for monetary policy. How policy instruments should
be optimally determined is primarily a question of the ultimate
objectives of the government (or, rather, of the society).
Given certain ultimate targets, such as employment and price
stability, the optimal policy will depend on the relative
importance of various
di~turbances,
and on the general
properties of the economic system, such as the degrees of wage
flexibility and international capital mobility. The formation
of expectations is particularly important in this context.
However, the rational-expectations game-theoretic models
discussed in section 1.2.3 do not deny that exchange rates and
the balance of payments are "concerns of policy management".
On the other hand, neither the stochastic IS-LM model nor the
rational expectations models offer any arguments to the effect
that "external balance" is a useful intermediate (let alone
ultimate) target. Rational expectations theories suggest that
expectations about future policies will be reflected in the
actual development of exchange rates, the current account and
the money stock, but this does not imply that these variables
are candidates for targets. Game-theoretic models have shown
that some intermediate targeting may be useful, but also that,
- 25 -
e.g., fixed exchange rates may be counterproductive.
The use of the current account as an information variable can
be questioned on the grounds of the logical argument that it
cannot contain any other information than is already contained
in savings and investments (or exports and imports) figures.
Likewise, since the balance of payments is a "monetary
phenomenon", it cannot be expected to contain any other
information than exchange and interest rates, the money stock,
etc. (if such data are available).
The "external balance constraint" thus seems to play a less
important role (if any) in theoretical analyses than in
discussions about actual stabilization policies. A brief
discussion of the Swedish experiences may serve as an
illustration of the practical importance of exchange-rate and
balance-af-payments issues.
1.3
SWEDISH STABILIZATION POLICY
In this section, I will summarize the Swedish experiences from
the last six or seven decades' stabilization pOlicies. The
descriptive parts draw on earlier work by Jonung (1979),
Lundberg (1983, 1985), Lindbeck (1975), and Soderstrom et ale
(1985a,b), to which the reader is referred for more detailed
treatments.
In an international comparison, Sweden was hit relatively
harder by the depression in the early 1920's than in the early
1930's. During the 1920's, economic policy was deliberately
deflationary, and the krona appreciated against the dollar
between 1920 and 1922. It is nevertheless believed that it
became "undervalued" if the development over a longer time
period and relative to a larger number of currencies is
considered. It has been estimated that the relative purchasing
power of the krona fell by around 10 per cent between 1914 and
1924.
- 26 -
Sweden returned to the gold standard, at pre-war parity, in
1924. During the remainder of the 1920's there was a steady
growth in output and the domestic price level fell slowly. As a
consequence of the international depression there was a more
marked fall in the price level between 1929 and 1931, when
Sweden abandoned the gold standard after a loss of foreign
exchange reserves. The krona immediately depreciated, and its
relative purchasing power fell by around 15 percent until the
domestic price level ~eached a bottom in 1933. It has been
argued that the krona once again became undervalued, and that
this was the main cause behind the recovery of the Swedish
economy after 1933. In June that year the monetary authorities
decided to peg the krona to the pound, and that policy was
followed until the outbreak of World War II.
The exchange rate policies during the 1920's and the 1930's
seem to have been governed by a price level target; a fixed
rate policy was followed when the development of international
prices was expected to be consistent with the price level goal,
and a flexible rate pOlicy otherwise. By the end of the 1930's
economists within the "Stockholm School", as well as pOlicy
makers, stated that the primary target of stabilization policy
should be employment, rather than the price level. The full
employment target became even more pronounced after the Second
World War, due to expectations of an immediate recession, but
this did not mean that inflation was neglected altogether. For
example, the krona was allowed to appreciate in 1946 in an
attempt to insulate the Swedish price level from the international inflationary tendencies.
Between 1951 and 1971 the value of the krona was pegged within
the cooperative system of internationally fixed exchange rates.
The domestic nominal wage and price levels thus had to be
adjusted to the international development. An interesting
question is whether the stable development of the Swedish
economy during the 1950's and 1960's was due to a successful
-
27 -
general stabilization policy, the exchange rate policy in
particular, or some exogenous factors outside the scope of
domestic macroeconomic policy.
Lundberg (1985) attributes the relatively stable development of
Swedish wages and prices during the 1950's and 1960's to the
consensus between employers and employees. This consensus was
formalized in 1969, in a report by three economists,
representing the employers' federation and the unions of blue
and white collar workers, the so called EFO report (cf. Edgren,
Faxen and Odhner (1969». According to the EFO model, the
domestic wage (in the tradables as well as the nontradables
sector) should adjust to the exogenous price increases and
technical progress in the tradables sector. 19 Soderstrom and
viotti (1979) question whether this is a correct picture of how
the Swedish economy developed in the period 1950-70. They
prefer to model wages as exogenously determined.
In Soderstrom's and viotti's model, labor market equilibrium
(full employment) is the result of accommodating fiscal (public
employment) policy. Money wage disturbances (wage increases in
excess of price and productivity changes) create deficits in
the government budget as well as the current account. Soderstrom and viotti argue that their model is consistent with the
empirical record.
When the world economy, following the first oil cr1s1s, turned
into a recession, Swedish economic policy was aimed at
preserving a high level of employment. International inflation,
in combination with the design of economic policy, gave rise to
extreme increases in nominal wages: more than 40 percent during
1975-76. The second half of the 1970's was characterized by
inflation and by government budget and current account
19 The Heckscher-Ohlin model offers a theoretical foundation
for the EFO model. For a presentation and a critical
discussion of the EFO model, see Lindbeck (1979). Chipman
(1985) presents some tests of the empirical relevance of
some of the ideas in the EFO and similar models.
- 28 -
deficits. Devaluations were undertaken in 1976 and 1977. In
connection with the devaluation in August 1977, Sweden left the
European system of cooperatively fixed exchange rates. The
value of the krona is now managed in terms of an official
"currency basket", an index of fifteen foreign currencies. The
krona has been devalued twice against the currency basket, in
September 1981 and in October 1982.
Bruno and Sachs (1985, Ch. 11) find that Sweden's economy has
performed relatively well in terms of the change in a "misery
index". Specifically, Sweden experienced a relatively small
rise in inflation and a relatively small slowdown in growth
between 1965-73 and 1973-79. Bruno and Sachs attribute this
development of the Swedish economy to its high degree of
"corporatism", which involves high degrees of unionization and
centralization of negotiations, low strike activity, and Social
Democratic power.
Many Swedish pOlicy makers and economists have drawn
conclusions which are quite the opposite of those of Bruno and
Sachs. For example, Calmfors (1985) points out that Sweden,
Austria, the Netherlands, Germany, and Norway - which are all
characterized as corporatist countries by Bruno and Sachs chose quite different policy strategies after the first oil
price shock. Interestingly, Sweden experienced a higher
increase in its misery index than the other corporatist
countries. Furthermore, a comparison of levels of growth and
inflation comes out less favorable to Sweden than an analysis
based on the change in the misery index. Sweden's growth was
below the OECD average during 1960-73 and 1973-81, and
inflation was higher than average in the latter period. Sachs
(1981) has shown that while Sweden showed a relation between
the current account and GNP which was identical to the average
relation for developed countries during 1965-73, the subsequent
deterioration of the current account was much stronger in
Sweden than on average - despite a stronger-than-average drop
in the rate of investment in Sweden. In comparison with other
- 29 -
small countries, the industrial production as well as the
current account balance has been lower than average in Sweden
during the second half of the 1970's and during the early
1980's (cf. Soderstrom et ale (1985a».
The discussions in section 1.2 may be used to shed some light
on the experiences from Swedish stabilization policy. In
Henderson's (1984) analysis the objective of the authorities is
to stabilize output, which probably is a correct representation
of Swedish policy since World War II. During the 1920's and
1930's in contrast, the price level seems to have been the main
target; whether a fixed or flexible exchange rate pOlicy was
followed, depended on the nature of various disturbances (cf.
Jonung (1979». It is tempting to characterize the policies in
Sweden during the 1950's and the 1960's as a "rates constant"
policy. The exchange rate was pegged within the Bretton Woods
system, and the interest rate was kept fairly stable (and low).
However, it is probably farfetched to argue that the rates
constant policy was based on considerations of the relative
importance of financial (asset market) and real (goods market)
disturbances. It seems more reasonable to view the willingness
to adhere to a fixed exchange rate pOlicy as reflecting a
general feeling that there was more to gain from international
cooperation than from an independent monetary policy. It should
also be noted that farreaching capital controls and credit
market regulations were in effect, which means that the Swedish
economy of the 1950's and the 1960's perhaps cannot be
accurately captured by Henderson's (1984) equilibrium
framework. As in the case of the labor market, there are
different views on the significance of imperfections in the
credit market. For example, Ettlin and Lybeck (1975) prefer to
characterize this market by disequilibrium, while Myhrman
(1973, 1975) and Genberq (1976) view the behavior of interest
rates as consistent with equilibrium in a small open economy.
Under the Bretton Woods regime the long run constraints imposed
by a fixed exchange rate policy were clearly recognized. The
-
30 -
contractive measures undertaken in 1969-1971 constitute an
example of the attention to the "external balance constraint".
In contrast, it is fairly obvious that the design of
stabilization policy (at least until 1982) under the fixed
rates system(s) following Bretton Woods, was not consistent
with a fixed exchange rate in the long run. The monetary
expansion and the official foreign borrowing that were
associated with the government bUdget deficits would hardly
have been accepted within a cooperative system of fixed
exchange rates. Although the monetary authorities officially
stuck with the fixed exchange rate policy, their actions seemed
to reveal an increased preference for inflation taxation and a
corresponding (but opposite) change in the taste for
international cooperation. Alternatively, one may interpret the
stabilization policies in general, and the devaluations in
particular, as a purposeful policy aimed at insulating
employment from the real shocks to the economy. Whether the
changes in policy reflect changes in the government's objective
function, or unusual disturbances to given objectives (or both)
is an open question.
Soderstrom et ale (1985a,b) suggest that Sweden should stick to
a "hard" fixed exchange rate policy. The case made in favor of
fixed exchange rates is, however, quite different from the
conditions that yield a rates constant policy as the optimal
strategy in Henderson's model. In the latter case the proper
exchange rate policy depends, among other things, on the
relative importance of financial and real disturbances, and on
the degree of wage flexibility. Soderstrom et al., on the other
hand, seem to argue that the functioning of the economy as a
whole and the labor market in particular depends on the degree
of exchange rate flexibility. In the 1970's, when the labor
force perceived that the government had shifted to an
inflationary policy rule, wage growth accelerated. This
observation is consis·tent with the game-theoretic analyses of,
e.g., Calmfors and Horn (1986), Andersen and Risager (1987a),
and Horn and Persson (1987). The full-employment pOlicy caused
- 31 -
the government budget balance as well as the current account to
deteriorate for reasons described by Soderstrom and viotti
(1979). Attempts to adjust the real wage by changes in the
exchange rate had limited success in the late 1970's, while it
had been possible to keep the krona undervalued for long
periods in the 1930's and the 1950's. This decrease in the
"money illusion" of the labor force can, just like the higher
wage demands, be understood as an adjustment to the change in
the stabilization policy regime.
Soderstrom et ale recommend that the authorities, in order to
increase the credibility of the fixed-rates policy, should
commit themselves to abstain from foreign borrowing and to
gradually loosen the restrictions on capital flows. To my
knowledge, it has not been shown, theoretically, how
credibility is affected by capital controls and foreign
borrowing. 20 As a matter of fact, however, the design of
economic policy after the latest devaluation has been largely
in line with the recommendations of Soderstrom et ale The fixed
exchange rate pOlicy has become more pronounced, and policy is
no longer obviously inconsistent with a fixed exchange rate in
the long run. The currency basket pOlicy involves less
international cooperation than the Bretton Woods and EMS
systems, but there has been a substantial ease of the various
capital controls. The authorities have also declared that they
will not increase the government's net foreign debt.
20 Recall that Rogoff (1985b) has shown that a fixed exchange
rate pOlicy may be counterproductive. Buiter (1987) shows
how the likelihood of a balance of payments crisis is
affected by official foreign borrowing, but he does not use
a game-theoretic framework. Bosworth and Rivlin (1987) argue
that the Swedish krona should be flexible, since no
inflation target can be credible, given the weight to
unemployment in the government's objective function. Fischer
(1986) gives a very brief but extremely enlightening summary
of the main arguments in the American discussion on similar
issues.
- 32 -
1.4
SUMMARY
The background material in this chapter should have made it
clear that international capital mobility should be a concern
of policy management, and that empirical studies of capital
mobility are valuable. At the same time, it is obvious that
knowledge of the degree of capital mobility would not, in
itself, be decisive for whether the exchange rate should be
fixed or flexible, or whether "external balance" (in some
sense) should be an intermediate or ultimate target for
macroeconomic pOlicies.
In principle, empirical studies of capital mobility on Swedish
data could be used to shed light on the questions whether
domestic and foreign securities are regarded as perfect
substitutes; whether the Bretton Woods era was characterized by
low or high capital mobility; whether capital mobility has
become higher or lower; whether the stronger-than-average
deterioration of the Swedish current account after the first
oil crisis was due to labor market and fiscal disturbances,
etc. Some of these questions will be dealt with in Chapters
2-5.
The purpose of Chapter 2 is to analyze the role of the forward
foreign exchange market in a simple portfolio balance model.
The forward market has been neglected in the models reviewed in
this chapter, but capital mobility is often discussed with
reference to the conditions on this particular market (see,
e.g., Boothe et al.(1985». In a world of some variance in
exchange rates, perfect capital mobility cannot be taken to
mean that nominal interest rates are necessarily equalized,
.
.
l.e.,
that r = r * . Frankel (1983) suggests that perfect capltal
mobility should be identified with covered interest parity
(CIP), i. e. ,
r
= r*
+ fp,
(1.16)
-
33 -
where fp is the forward premium (in percent) on the foreign
. per10d
..
currency (for the hold1ng
wh1ch rand r * refer to).
In Chapter 2 the earlier analysis of the Swedish money market
by Englund, Horngren, and viotti (1985) is extended to
incorporate the forward foreign exchange market. The portfolio
balance model is designed so as to capture important
institutional features, such as capital controls, the central
bank's supply of borrowed reserves, etc. In other respects, the
model relies on restrictive but simplifying assumptions.
Income, prices, and wealth are treated as exogenous variables,
which means that questions about the transmission mechanism
cannot be studied. Exchange rate expectations are similarly
assumed to be exogenous.
Chapter 2 contains a discussion about the relation between (as
well as the definitions of) capital mobility and monetary
autonomy. It is suggested that the higher the degree of capital
mobility, the lower is the degree of monetary autonomy; but
also that perfect capital mobility does not imply that there is
no autonomy at all. CIP implies that domestic securities and
foreign securities that are covered in the forward market are
perfect substitutes. However, unless the net supply of forward
foreign exchange is infinitely elastic, the central bank can
affect the forward premium and the domestic interest rate
through interventions in the forward market as well as through
conventional open market operations. Furthermore, unless the
net supply is completely inelastic, it will not be true that
foreign borrowing which is covered in the forward market leaves
the foreign exchange reserves unaltered, a~ has sometimes been
suggested. The analysis in Chapter 2 also suggests that the
Swedish capital controls that put restrictions on foreigners'
holdings of domestic securities may be ineffective.
The question of the elasticity of the net supply on the forward
market is related to whether domestic and foreign securities
are perfect substitutes on an uncovered basis. If they are, it
-
34 -
must be that their expected returns are equal, i.e., uncovered
interest parity (UIP) must hold:
r
(1.17)
where se is the expected rate of depreciation of the domestic
currency. Note that (1.16) and (1.17) together imply that
se
=
fp
(1.18)
which says that the forward premium is an unbiased predictor of
the rate of change of the spot exchange rate. In effect,
perfect sUbstitutability on an uncovered basis must imply that
there is an infinitely elastic supply of forward foreign
exchange, given the expected rate of change of the exchange
rate.
Chapter 3 reviews theoretical and empirical results on the
degree of sUbstitutability between assets that are denominated
in different currencies. Unlike the discussions in Chapters 1
and 2, the analyses in Chapter 3 do not rely on postulated
asset demand functions. Since the latter chapter is devoted to
investigations of what determines asset sUbstitability, it can
be said to offer some micro foundations for the monetary and
portfolio balance approaches.
A central theme in the discussions in Chapters 3 and 4 is that
the degree of asset sUbstitutability depends on the design of
the ruling exchange rate system. This idea marks an important
difference compared to the models which have been discussed in
this chapter. Mundell (1963) analyzes the effects of monetary
and fiscal pOlicies under different exchange rate regimes with
perfect capital mobility as the maintained assumption; and
Henderson (1984) argues that the optimal exchange rate pOlicy
depends on the degree of asset sUbstitutability. However, when
the micro foundations of the postulated asset demand functions
are examined, it turns out that asset sUbstitutability also is
-
35 -
a function of the degree of exchange rate flexibility. This
idea is not new, of course; see, e.g., Aliber (1972).
The empirical studies summarized in Chapter 3 lead to the
conclusion that UIP (or unbiasedness) usually can be rejected,
which means that imperfect asset sUbstitutability may leave
some scope for independent national monetary policies. The
exact nature of this independence has not been clarified,
however, since attempts to explain observed deviations from UIP
(or unbiasedness) in terms of structural forms often fail.
Tests of (1.17) and (1.18) are most often carried out in terms
of bilateral exchange and interest rates, without any analysis
of the properties of actual exchange rate systems. In Chapter 4
we apply some of the methods presented in Chapter 3 to the
Swedish currency basket system. The chapter offers a
characterization of the currency basket regime and derives some
implications for empirical analyses of asset substitutability
in currency basket systems. It is suggested that bilateral
studies of exchange rates which are governed by basket policies
offer little (if any) insights into the question about the
scope for monetary policy. When applied to the Swedish krona in
relation to the official basket currencies, an empirical test
of (1.18) points to the conclusion that domestic and foreign
assets are not viewed as perfect substitutes.
The empirical analysis in Chapter 4 is confined to monthly data
from the 1980's. To limit the study to this period seems
reasonable in view of the deregulations of the Swedish credit
market that have taken place only recently. One may even argue
that the empirical analysis should be confined to the period
after the latest devaluation in October 1982.
The empirical study of the Swedish current account, in
Chapter 5, makes use of a sUbstantially larger data set
(quarterly data, 1947-1985). The results in Chapter 5 are based
on an estimated vector autoregressive (VAR) model of four
-
36 -
variables, including the current account. VAR models are
generally of limited use for pOlicy analysis or for testing the
relevance of competing theories. Our primary purpose is to
investigate how various shocks to the economy interact in the
determination of the current account. We ask, e.g., how the
current account evolves over time after a terms of trade shock,
and whether labor supply shocks are relatively more important
to the development than shocks to fiscal policy. Following Sims
(1980) and others, these questions are adressed by techniques
of "impulse response" analyses and "innovation accounting".
Intertemporal general equilibrium models teach that the
qualitative effects on the current account of autonomous
movements in, e.g., terms of trade are generally ambiguous;
substitution and wealth effects tend to go in different
directions. An empirical study should therefore be useful.
Information on the quantitative effects of various disturbances
may also give some indications about the optimal pOlicy in
response to current account imbalances.
A principal finding in Chapter 5 is that the forecast error
variance in the current account is to a very limited extent
(less than 20 percent over a couple of years) explained by
innovations to the wage, terms of trade, or government
consumption. This is in contrast with the "conventional wisdom"
(cf. section 1.3) and also with the results for some of the
other variables. For example, innovations in the wage equation
explain less than half of the variance of the wage.
- 37 -
REFERENCES
Aliber, R.Z. (1972), "Uncertainty, Currency Areas, and the
Exchange Rate System", Economica, Vol. 39, pp. 432-441.
Andersen, T.M. and o. Risager (1987a), "The Role of Credibility
for the Effects of a Change in the Exchange-Rate Policy",
Institute for International Economic Studies, Seminar
Paper No. 377, University of stockholm.
Andersen, T.M. and o. Risager (1987b), "Stabilization Policies,
Credibility, and Interest Rate Determination in a Small
Open Economy", European Economic Review, forthcoming.
A
Boothe, P., K. Clinton, A. Cote, and D. Longworth (1985),
International Asset Substitutability. Theory and Evidence
for Canada, Bank of Canada.
Bosworth, B.P. and A.M. Rivlin (1987), eds., The Swedish
Economy, The Brookings Institution, Washington D.C.
Boyer, R.S. (1978a), "Financial Policies in an Open Economy",
Economica, Vol. 45, pp. 39-57.
Boyer, R.S. (1978b), "Optimal Foreign Exchange Market
Intervention", Journal of Political Economy, Vol. 86, pp.
1045-1055.
Boyer, R.S. (1979), "sterilization and the Monetary Approach to
Balance of Payments Analysis", Journal of Monetary
Economics, Vol. 5, pp. 295-300.
Bruno, M. and J. Sachs (1985), Economics of Worldwide
Stagflation, Basil Blackwell, Oxford.
Buiter, W.R. (1987), "Borrowing to Defend the Exchange Rate and
the Timing of Speculative Attacks", Journal of
International Economics, Vol. 23, pp. 221-239.
Calmfors, L. (1985), "The Roles of Stabilization Policy and
Wage setting for Macroeconomic Stability - The Experiences
of Economies with Centralized Bargaining", Kyklos, Vol.
38, pp. 329-347.
Calmfors, L. and H. Horn (1986), "Employment Policies and
Centralized Wage-setting", Economica, Vol. 53, pp.
281-302.
Chipman, J.S. (1980), "Exchange-Rate Flexibility and Resource
Allocation", in Chipman and Kindleberger, edse,
Exchange-Rate Flexibility and Resource Allocation,
North-Holland, Amsterdam, pp. 159-209.
- 38 -
Chipman, J.S. (1985), "Relative Prices, Capital Movements, and
Sectoral Technical Change: Theory and an Empirical Test",
in Jungenfelt and Hague, eds., Structural Adjustment in
Developed Open Economies, Macmillan, London, pp. 395-454.
Carden, W.M. (1985), Inflation. Exchange Rates, and the World
Economy, Third edition, Clarendon Press, Oxford.
Cukierman, A. (1986), "Central Bank Behavior and Credibility Some Recent Developments", Federal Reserve Bank of st.
Louis Review, Vol. 68, pp. 5-17.
Dornbusch, R. (1976), "Expectations and Exchange Rate
Dynamics", Journal of Political Economy, Vol. 85, pp.
1161-1176.
Drazen, A. and E. Helpman (1986), "Exchange Rate Management
and Monetary and Fiscal Policy", mimeD, Tel Aviv
University.
Edgren, G., K.-O. Faxen, and C.-E. Odhner (1969), "Wages,
Growth and the Distribution of Income", Swedish Journal of
Economics, Vol. 71, pp. 133-160.
Englund, P., L. Horngren, and S. viotti (1985), itA Short-Term
Model of the Swedish Money Market", Institute for
International Economic Studies, Seminar Paper No. 316,
University of Stockholm.
Ettlin, F. and J.A. Lybeck (1975), "An Analytical Treatment of
Swedish Monetary Policy. critical Comments and Formulation
of an Alternative Model", Swedish Journal of Economics,
Vol. 77, pp. 377-394.
Fischer, S. (1986), "Comments and Discussion", symposium on
Exchange Rates, Trade, and Capital Flows, Brookings Papers
on Economic Activity, pp. 227-232.
Flood, ReP. (1979), "Capital Mobility and the Choice of
Exchange Rate System", International Economic Review, Vol.
20, pp. 405-416.
Frankel, J.A. (1983), "Monetary and Portfolio-Balance Models of
Exchange Rate Determination", in Bhandari and Putnam,
eds., Economic Interdependence and Flexible Exchange
Rates, MIT Press, ppe 84-115.
Frenkel, J.A. and H.G. Johnson (1976), "The Monetary Approach
to the Balance of Payments. Essential Concepts and
Historical Origins", in Frenkel and Johnson, eds., The
Monetary Approach to the Balance of Payments, University
of Toronto Press, pp. 21-45.
Frenkel, J.A. and M. Mussa (1981), "Monetary and Fiscal
Policies in an Open Economy", American Economic Review
Papers and proceedings, Vol. 71 (May 1981), pp. 253-258.
- 39 -
Frenkel, J.A. and M. Mussa (1985), "Asset Markets, Exchange
Rates and the Balance of Payments", in Jones and Kenen,
eds., Handbook of International Economics, Vol. II,
North-Holland, Amsterdam, pp. 679-747.
Genberg, A.H. (1976), "Aspects of the Monetary Approach to the
Balance of Payments Theory. An Empirical study of Sweden",
in Frenkel and Johnson, eds., The Monetary Approach to the
Balance of Payments, University of Toronto Press, pp.
298-325.
Helpman, E. and L. Leiderman (1987), "Stabilization in
High-Inflation countries: Analytical Foundations and
Recent Experience", Carnegie Rochester Conference Series
on Public Policy, forthcoming.
Henderson, D.W. (1977), "Modeling the Interdependence of
National Money and Capital Markets", American Economic
Review Papers and Proceedings, Vol. 67 (February 1977),
pp. 190-199.
Henderson, D.W. (1979), "Financial Policies in Open Economies",
American Economic Review Papers and Proceedings, Vol. 69
(May 1979), pp. 232-239.
Henderson, D.W. (1984), "Exchange Market Intervention
operations: Their Role in Financial Policy and Their
Effects", in Bilson and Marston, eds., Exchange Rate
Theory and Practice, University of Chicago Press/NBER,
Chicago, pp. 357-406.
Horn, H. and T. Persson (1987), "Exchange Rate Policy, Wage
Formation and Credibility", European Economic Review,
forthcoming.
Jonung, L. (1979), "Knut Wicksells prisstabiliseringsnorm och
penningpolitiken pa 1930-talet" (Knut Wicksell's price
stabilization norm and monetary pOlicy in the 1930's), in
Herin and Werin, eds., Ekonomisk debatt och ekonomisk
politik, Norstedts, stockholm, pp. 35-83.
Kareken, J. and N. Wallace (1978), "International Monetary
Reform: The Feasible Alternatives", Federal Reserve Bank
of Minneapolis Quarterly Review, Summer 1978, pp. 2-7.
Kareken, J. and N. Wallace (1981), "On the Indeterminacy of
Equilibrium Exchange Rates", Quarterly Journal of
Economics, Vol. 96, pp. 207-222.
Lindbeck, A. (1975), Swedish Economic Policy, Macmillan,
London.
- 40 -
Lindbeck, A. (1979), "Imported and structural Inflation and
Aggregate Demand: The Scandinavian Model Reconstructed",
in Lindbeck, ed., Inflation and Employment in Open
Economies, North-Holland, Amsterdam, pp. 13-40.
Lucas, R.E., Jr. (1982), "Interest Rates and Currency Prices in
a Two-Country World", Journal of Monetary Economics, Vol.
10, pp. 335-359.
Lundberg, E. (1983), Ekonomiska kriser forr och nu (Economic
crises past and present), Studieforbundet Naringsliv och
Samhalle, stockholm.
Lundberg, E. (1985), "The Rise and Fall of the Swedish Model",
Journal of Economic Literature, Vol. 23, pp. 1-36.
Marston, R.C. (1985), "Stabilization Policies in Open
Economies", in Jones and Kenen, eds., Handbook of
International Economics, Vol. II, North-Holland,
Amsterdam, pp. 859-916.
Mundell, R.Atl (1962), "The Appropriate Use of Monetary and
Fiscal Policy under Fixed Exchange Rates", IMF Staff
Papers, Vol. 7, pp. 70-79. Reprinted in Mundell,
International Economics, pp. 223-239. Page references are
to the latter.
Mundell, R.A. (1963), "Capital Mobility and Stabilization
Policy Under Fixed and Flexible Exchange Rates", Canadian
Journal of Economics and Political Science, Vol. 29, pp.
475-485.
Myhrman, J. (1973), nAn Analytical Treatment of Swedish
Monetary Policy", Swedish Journal of Economics, Vol. 75,
pp. 221-237.
Myhrman, J. (1975), "An Analytical Treatment of Swedish
Monetary Policy. critical Comments and Formulation of an
Alternative Model. Reply", Swedish Journal of Economics,
Vol. 77, pp. 395-402.
Obstfeld, Me (1980), "Imperfect Asset SUbstitutability and
Monetary Policy under Fixed Exchange Rates", Journal of
International 'Economics, Vol. 10, pp. 177-200.
Obstfeld, M. (1982), "The Capitalization of Income Streams and
the Effects of Open-Market Operations under Fixed Exchange
Rates", Journal of Monetary Economics, Vol. 9, pp. 87-98.
Obstfeld, MOl (1984), "Balance-of-Payments Crises and
Devaluation", Journal of Money, Credit, and Banking, Vol.
16, pp. 208-217.
- 41 -
Obstfeld, M. and A.C. stockman (1985), "Exchange-Rate
Dynamics", in Jones and Kenen, eds., Handbook of
International Economics, Vol. II, North Holland,
Amsterdam, pp. 917-977.
Persson, T. (1987), "Credibility and Macroeconomic Policy: A
Broad Survey", European Economic Review, forthcoming.
Persson, T. and L.E.O. Svensson (1987), New Methods in the
Swedish Medium-Term Survey, Supplement No. 3 to the 1987
Medium-Term Survey, Allmanna Forlaget, stockholm.
Poole, w. (1970), "Optional Choice of Monetary Policy
Instruments in a simple Stochastic Macro Model", Quarterly
Journal of Economics, Vol. 84, pp. 197-216.
Rogoff, K. (1985a), "The Optimal Degree of Commitment to an
Intermediary Monetary Target", Quarterly Journal of
Economics, Vol. 100, pp. 1169-1189.
Rogoff, K. (1985b), "Can International Monetary Policy
Cooperation be Counterproductive?", Journal of
International Economics, Vol. 18, pp. 199-217.
Sachs, J. (1981), "The Current Account and Macroeconomic
Adjustment in the 1970's", Brookings Papers on Economic
Activity, pp. 202-268.
Sims, C.A .. (1980), "Macroeconomics and Reality", Econometrica,
Vol. 48, pp. 1-48.
Stockman, A.C. (1983), "Real Exchange Rates under Alternative
Nominal Exchange-Rate Systems", Journal of International
Money and Finance, Vol. 2, pp. 147-166 ..
Svensson, L.E.O. and A. Razin (1983), "The Terms of Trade and
the Current Account: The Harberger-Laursen-Metzler
Effect", Journal of Political Economy, Vol. 91, pp.
97-125.
Swoboda, A.K. (1973), "Monetary Policy under Fixed Exchange
Rates. Effectiveness, the Speed of Adjustment and Proper
Use", Economica, Vol . 40, pp. 136-154. Reprinted in
Frenkel and Johnson, eds., The Monetary Approach to the
Balance of Payments, University of Toronto Press, pp.
237-261. Page references are to the latter.
Soderstrom, H.T., I. Hansson, L. Jonung, and J. Myhrman
(1985a), Vagen till ett stabilare Sverige, Studieforbundet
Naringsliv och Samhalle, Stockholm.
Soderstrom, H.T., I. Hansson, L. Jonung, and J. Myhrman
(1985b), Sweden - the road to stability, Studieforbundet
Naringsliv och Samhalle, stockholm.
- 42 -
Soderstrom, H.T. and S. viotti (1979), "Money Wage Disturbances
and the Endogeneity of the Public Sector in an Open
Economy", in Lindbeck, ed., Inflation and Employment in
Open Economies, North-Holland, Amsterdam, pp. 71-98.
Tower, E. and T.D. Willett (1976), The Theory of Optimum
Currency Areas and Exchange-Rate Flexibility, Special
Papers in International Economics, No. 11, International
Finance section, Princeton university.
Vinals, J. (1986), "Fiscal Policy and the Current Account",
Economic Policy, pp. 712-744.
Williamson, J.H. (1971), "On the Normative Theory of
Balance-of-Payments Adjustment", in Clayton, Gilbert, and
Sedgwick, eds., Monetary Theory and Policy in the 1970's,
Oxford, pp. 235-266.
-
43 -
2. Capital Mobility and Monetary
Autonomy*
2.1
INTRODUCTION
In this chapter, I discuss the relation between capital
movements and monetary policy in the context of a simple
portfolio balance model that incorporates the forward foreign
exchange market. This market is seldom explicitly treated in
portfolio balance models intended for analysis of monetary
policy, but can be shown to be crucial for discussions about
the importance of capital mobility and various capital
controls.
The importance of the forward market stems from the fact that
in a world of perfect capital mobility, arbitrage activities
should guarantee that international differences in nominal
interest rates are matched by differences between spot and
forward exchange rates. If capital is perfectly mobile, the
monetary authorities in a small open economy can affect the
domestic interest rate only insofar as they can affect forward
premia. The determination of equilibrium in the forward market,
and its interaction with the money market, is thus crucial for
*
I am indebted to staffan viotti and Lars Horngren for many
helpful comments and suggestions.
- 44 -
questions of capital mobility and monetary autonomy. These
concepts are discussed at a general level in section 2.2.
In order to analyze the scope for monetary policy in an economy
like Sweden more formally, a portfolio balance model is set out
in section 2.3. The model is intended to capture important
institutional features of the Swedish credit market - such as
the pegged exchange rate and discount window policies, and
capital controls - and is, basically, an extension of the model
presented by Englund, Horngren, and vietti (1985). The
extension refers to the forward foreign exchange market.
Although the model is designed to capture specific Swedish
features, it should be of relevance to other economies as well.
In section 2.4 the model is analyzed under the assumptions of
imperfect and perfect capital mobility. It is shown that if
capital mobility is taken to mean the degree of
substitutability between domestic securities and foreign
securities which are covered in the forward foreign exchange
market, perfect capital mobility does not imply that there is
no monetary autonomy, although higher capital mobility implies
lower autonomy. If domestic and foreign securities are perfect
SUbstitutes also on an uncovered basis, or, equivalently, if
the supply of forward foreign currency is infinitely elastic,
there will be no autonomy.
These results are not new. As they are presented within a
theoretical model of the Swedish credit market, the analysis
still has important implications for policy as well as
empirical research. For instance, the analysis in section 2.4 in combination with earlier empirical results, discussed in
section 2.5 - suggests that the capital controls which restrict
foreign holdings of domestic securities are ineffective.
While the absolute degree of monetary autonomy in any
individual country may be hard to measure (and even to define),
comparisons of empirical studies of different countries may
- 45 -
give some information about relative degrees of autonomy.
section 2.5 thus reports the results of a review of the
evidence in the cases of Sweden and West Germany.
The theoretical analysis in section 2.4 and the review of
empirical results in section 2.5 together lead to the
conclusion that single-equation empirical studies cannot offer
any measures of the degree of monetary autonomy. This result is
perhaps not surprising, but the model in section 2.3 may serve
as a useful starting point for further empirical studies of the
Swedish money and forward foreign exchange markets.
2.2
THE CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK
The actual size of international capital flows does not tell us
anything about the degree of capital mobility: small movements
of capital at given international differences in assets returns
do not imply that there is low mobility in the sense of small
sensitivity to changes in such differences. We do expect,
however, a high degree of capital mobility to imply that
similar assets yield about the same return, irrespectively of
where they are issued.
In the seminal paper by Mundell (1963), perfect capital
mobility is taken to mean that the level of the domestic
interest rate (r) equals the general level prevailing abroad
.18 assumed that these 1nterest
.
(r*
). It
rates refer to assets
with identical characteristics (e.g., with respect to default
risk) except for currency denomination.
In a world of some variance in exchange rates, interest rate
differentials do not constitute evidence of imperfect capital
mobility. However, if there are no prohibitive capital controls
and if transaction costs are negligible, we expect arbitrage
activities to bring about covered interest parity (elP):
r
r
*
+ fp,
(2.1)
- 46 -
. and fore1gn
. .1nterest rates on
where rand r * are the domest1c
nominally safe securities, and fp is the forward premium (in
. exchange. If rand r * refer to assets w1th
.
percent) on fore1gn
identical characteristics, except for currency denomination, a
purchase of foreign securities coupled with a sale of forward
foreign currency does not involve any risk over and above that
of a purchase of domestic securities. In the absence of capital
controls, transaction costs and other obstacles to mobility,
there are no reasons to expect default-free domestic and
covered foreign-currency securities to be less than perfect
SUbstitutes, i.e., to expect (2.1) to be violated. Following
Frankel (1983) we may, therefore, identify perfect capital
mobility with CIP. 1
Whether domestic and uncovered foreign securities are regarded
as perfect SUbstitutes is not primarily a question of the
degree of capital mobility, however. If there is some variance
in the exchange rate, a purchase of a foreign security which is
not combined with a matching sale of forward foreign currency
will have different characteristics than a purchase of a
domestic security. Perfect SUbstitutability between domestic
and uncovered foreign securities would imply uncovered interest
parity (UIP):
r
r
*
Ae ,
+ S
(2.2)
where se is the expected rate of depreciation of the domestic
currency. Capital controls and transaction costs may be
explanations for deviations from UIP, but even in the absence
1
Let S denote the spot exchange rate (units of domestic
currency per units of foreign currency) and F the forward
exchange rate. A purchase of a foreign security, with
nominal value X and interest rate r*, coupled with a sale of
foreign currency forward, yields gross return (l+r*)FX. A
purchase of a domestic security, with nominal value SX and
interest rate r, yields (l+r)SX. CIP implies that these
transactions give the same return, i.e., that FjS =
(l+r)j(l+r*). (2.1) relies on the approximations In(l+r) ~
r, In(l+r*) ~ r*, and fp
{F-S)jS ~ InF - InS.
=
- 47 -
of such obstacles to capital mobility there is a possibility
that UIP is violated due to exchange risk.
There does not, of course, exist any single acceptable
definition of the concept capital mobility. Different
definitions may be appropriate in different circumstances, and
Frankel's (1983) definition has obvious disadvantages, since it
is not operational for discussions about the mobility of
nominally risky assets or (long term) assets which may be
impossible to cover in the forward market. 2 The mobility
concept nevertheless has to be explicitly defined in any
discussion of how capital mobility affects the scope for
monetary pOlicy.3 Since deviations from CIP are more directly
related to the degree of capital mobility than deviations from
UIP, I will henceforth identify capital mobility with the
degree of sUbstitutability between domestic and covered (rather
than uncovered) foreign-currency securities. It deserves to be
emphasized, however, that CIP is only implied by, and does not
imply, perfect capital mobility.
As is the case with "capital mobility", there does not, to my
knOWledge, exist any unanimously accepted definition of the
concept "monetary autonomy". Kareken and Wallace (1978),
Obstfeld (1980a) and Laidler (1986) seem to identify monetary
independence with the possibility to control the domestic price
level (primarily in the long run). It is easily seen that with
this definition some flexibility in the exchange rate is a
sufficient condition for autonomy. If the small-open-economy
and purchasing-power-parity hypotheses are valid for the
economy in question, exchange rate flexibility even becomes
2
Mobility is sometimes measured by how fast portfolios are
adjusted - cf. Dornbusch and Krugman (1976), Dornbusch
(1980), and Cumby and Obstfeld (1983). It may also be argued
that exchange rate risk hampers mobility - see Aliber (1978)
and Eaton and Turnovsky (1983). For a general discussion of
the mobility concept, see stulz (1986).
3
Frenkel and Mussa (1981) identify high capital mobility with
CIP, but their pOlicy conclusions seem to be based on a
model which is also characterized by UIP.
-
48 -
necessary.
A flexible exchange rate generally allows the monetary
authorities to affect the short run equilibrium levels of,
e.g., interest rate(s) and the money stock. Monetary policy can
be designed so as to change rational agents' expectations about
(the distribution of) the future exchange rate. Such a change
will affect the private sector's portfolio choice, and will
lead to changes in the equilibrium values of nominal interest
rates and asset stocks, irrespectively of the degree of
international capital mobility and asset substitutability.
Furthermore, a flexible exchange rate policy gives the monetary
authorities a freedom to determine their activities in the
foreign exchange market in consideration of the development of
the foreign exchange reserves. In a fully flexible system there
is no intervention at all, which implies that the level of
reserves will be constant (and possibly equal to zero). Hence,
if monetary autonomy is taken to mean the possibility to
achieve some target levels of the nominal interest rate, the
money stock and the foreign exchange reserves, adherence to a
flexible exchange rate policy would be sufficient to guarantee
monetary autonomy (in the short as well as in the long run). In
practice, fully flexible or completely fixed exchange rates are
rare phenomena. Under either regime, monetary authorities seem
to worry about the degree of monetary autonomy, which indicates
that they do not view exchange rate flexibility as the key to
autonomy.
In the theoretical framework set out by Henderson (1984), which
was discussed in Chapter 1, the only ultimate target for (short
run) stabilization policy is to stabilize employment. Henderson
shows that a fixed, flexible, or managed float exchange rate
policy may be optimal, depending on the structure of the
economy. The optimal strategy depends, among other things, on
the nature of the disturbances that hit the economy and on the
authorities' information about these disturbances. In the
terminology of Henderson, the exchange rate (and the interest
-
49 -
rate and money stock as well) is either used as an "instrument"
(if fixed) or an "information variable" (if flexible, and if,
e.g., the money stock is changed in response to observed
movements in it). The exchange rate, the money stock, and the
interest rate are thus alternative instruments of monetary
policy; the achievement of specific levels for these variables
is of no independent value for stabilization policy.
with the background of Henderson's theoretical analysis as well
as of practical experiences, one may thus question the idea
that a flexible exchange rate would guarantee monetary
autonomy.4 I believe that the latter concept can be taken to
mean the possibility to influence the other instruments or
information variables (in particular, the interest rate) given
a specific (predetermined) value of the exchange rate.
(Alternatively, we may identify monetary independence with the
possibility to influence the exchange rate, given a specific
value of the domestic interest rate.)
It is clear that under this interpretation of the autonomy
concept, imperfect sUbstitutability between domestic and
uncovered foreign securities is crucial for monetary
independence. Unless UIP is violated, interest and exchange
rates cannot be independently determined, and there can be no
monetary autonomy in a small open economy. Perfect capital
mobility (eIP), however, need not imply total lack of autonomy
since the authorities may have the possibility to affect the
forward premium associated with any given expected rate of
currency depreciation. A portfolio balance model which
incorporates the forward foreign. exchange market provides a
theoretical framework for an analysis of these issues.
2.3
THE MODEL
The portfolio balance model presented in this section is a
short term model of the financial sector. Following. common
4
See also Aliber (1972).
-
50 -
practice in portfolio balance models (see, e.g., Henderson
(1977» I take "short term" and "financial" to mean that
financial wealth, income and nominal goods prices can be
treated as exogenous variables, and that the markets for long
term financial assets, equity, real assets, etc., can be
neglected. Since the transmission mechanisms between the real
and financial sectors are not modelled, the question about the
scope for monetary policy can only be discussed in terms of the
effects of, e.g., open market operations on financial variables
such as the interest rate on domestic securities, the money
stock, the balance of payments, etc. No attempt will be made to
relate such "intermediate targets" (or "information variables")
to "Ultimate targets" such as consumption and employment. In
comparison with the models reviewed in Chapter 1, therefore,
the portfolio balance model in this chapter gives a more
limited description of the effects of monetary policy. This
cost is hopefully balanced by the benefit of a more detailed
analysis of various credit market institutions. The limitations
of the model will become clear as it is presented, but I
believe that it captures important features of the Swedish
credit market.
The Swedish exchange rate policy is one of a basically fixed
exchange rate (cf. Chapter 1). In this chapter, the spot
exchange rate as well as exchange rate expectations will be
treated as exogenous; a thorough discussion of the currency
basket policy is postponed until Chapter 4. Another important
feature of the Swedish credit market is the capital controls
which, in particular, prohibit foreign investors from holding
domestic securities. A third characteristic feature is the
central bank's "discount window" policy, which has been
analyzed in a sequence of papers by Englund et ale (see
Horngren (1986». Englund, Horngren and viotti (1985) follow
Mundell (1963) in that they neglect the forward foreign
exchange market and identify perfect capital mobility with the
condition r
r*. In this chapter their analysis is extended to
incorporate a forward foreign exchange market, which in turn is
- 51 -
modelled as in previous studies by Black (1973) and Herring and
Marston (1977).
Four domestic sectors are identified - the government, the
central bank (CB), the public, and the banking sectors. The
balance sheets for these sectors are listed below. (All stocks
are measured in terms of the domestic currency.)
+ F
B
T
C
g
= T,
+ RB + R= RR,
b
b
T +RR+ F
D + RB,
TP + D + FU + FC
w.
(government)
(2 .. 3)
(CB)
(2.4)
(banks)
(2.5)
(public)
(2.6)
The variables are defined as follows:
accumulated government debt;
government net holdings of securities denominated in
foreign currency;
stock of treasury bills;
net holdings of domestic securities by sector i
(i
D
W
= c,
b, p);
borrowed reserves;
required reserves;
foreign exchange reserves;
the banks' and the pUblic's net holdings of
foreign-currency securities which are covered
in the forward foreign exchange market;
the pUblic's net holdings of uncovered
foreign-currency securities;
bank deposits;
private net financial wealth.
The pUblic's demand for deposits, domestic securities, and
foreign-currency securities are defined by the following
- 52 -
functions:
TP =
tp[r,
D
d[r,
"'e , r D ,
r * + fp, r* + S
"'e , r D ,
r * + fp, r * + S
s] ;
s] ;
(2.7)
(2.8)
U
fU[r,
"'e , r D ,
r * + fp, r * + S
s] ;
(2.9)
FC
fC[r,
r * + fp, r
s] ;
(2 • 10)
F
*
+ se, r D ,
where r, r*, and r D are the (nominally safe) interest rates on
domestic securities, foreign-currency securities, and deposits,
"'e is
respectively. fp is the forward premium (in percent), and S
the expected rate of depreciation of the domestic currency. S
is the current level of the exchange rate (units of domestic
currency per unit of foreign currency). It enters the asset
demand functions since changes in the exchange rate affect the
real value of asset stocks. Note that important additional
(exogenous) variables have been suppressed. For example,
financial wealth (W) should be an argument in each of the
functions above, along with the levels of income, prices, etc.
The assets are assumed to be gross substitutes, and the listed
functions are sUbject to the adding up constraint that total
holdings amount to total wealth. The former assumption implies
that the partial derivatives tP, f;, f~, d 4 > 0, and that the
cross effects (tl' i=2,3,4, etc.) are negative.
Like portfolio balance models in general, our model rests on
an implicit and ad hoc assumption of imperfect asset
sUbstitutability. Since asset demand functions have just been
postulated and not derived from maximizing behavior, there is
nothing in the model that explains why domestic deposits and
securities, or domestic and foreign securities, are not viewed
as perfect sUbstitutes. In particular, one may question why
domestic and covered foreign-currency securities should be
-
53 -
treated as imperfectly substitutable. The question of the
degree of sUbstitutability between different assets denominated
in the same currency is a fundamental problem in monetary
economics which we will not try to discuss here. 5 As to the
sUbstitutability between assets denominated in different
currencies, we will examine the consequences of perfect
substitutability in section 2.4. The degree of sUbstitutability
between domestic and uncovered foreign-currency securities is
further discussed in Chapters 3-4.
We follow Englund, Horngren, and viotti (1985) and make the
assumption that the interest rate on deposits can be treated as
a predetermined variable in a short term model of interest rate
determination. The banks are thus assumed to passively accept
deposits from the pUblic at the predetermined interest rate r D ,
and are sUbject to a reserve ratio requirement,
aD.
RR
(2.11)
Banks allocate their remaining funds, (l-a)D, to domestic and
foreign-currency securities. Capital controls prohibit banks
from taking open net positions in foreign currency, which means
that all purchases or sales of foreign-currency securities are
covered in the forward foreign exchange market (and vice
versa). As in Englund, Horngren, and viotti (1985), banks have
the option to borrow from the CB at the market rate r (and to
issue certificates of deposits, which we model as negative
holdings of domestic securities). Borrowed reserves (and
certificates of deposits) are thus perfect sUbstitutes to other
short term papers (t-bills) in domestic currency, and term
structure problems are neglected. The banks' behavior can be
summarized as follows:
T
5
b
-
RB =
t
b[ r,
r * + fp, S] ,
(2.12)
For a discussion of this issue, see, e.ge, Wallace (1983).
-
54 -
(2 • 13)
where t b1
_f b1 > 0 , t b2
_f b
0
2 < •
The CB's behavior is given by the following two functions:
(2 • 14)
RB
(2 . 15)
where r-- is an exogenous "benchmark" level of the interest rate.
We can describe the Riksbank's policy until December 1985 as
characterized by g1 = 00. This is the case of a completely open
discount window, with an infinitely elastic supply of borrowed
reserves at the "penalty rate" r. It should be noted that such
a policy is sufficient to guarantee that r =
only if the
demand for borrowed reserves is positive. since December 1985,
g(.) is a discontinuous step function (cf. Horngren (1986), Ch.
3), but in the analyses below it will be assumed that it can be
approximated by a continuous function, and that 0 < 9 1 < 00. 6
r
The reaction function (2.14) allows for complete sterilization
of changes in foreign exchange reserves as a special case (hi
= -1, h 2 = 0). In recent years, however, the monetary
authorities have shown less concern over the change in exchange
reserves than over the "private currency flow", which is
defined as the change in foreign exchange reserves less the
increase in the government's foreign debt. Such a policy, which
is characterized by a reaction function where hi = h 2 , can be
justified by the argument that (autonomous) changes in Fg must
be interpreted as the result of purposeful behavior from the
6
In the system operating until December 1985, there was a
limited supply of borrowed reserves at a "discount rate" and
an unlimited supply at a higher "penalty rate". An
individual bank either borrowed (if at all) at the discount
rate or the penalty rate, depending on the quantity
borrowed.
~
55 ....
monetary authorities; to sterilize such capital flows then
makes no sense.
If the CB does not want to neutralize the effects of currency
flows on the monetary base, but rather tries to reinforce such
effects (e.g., in attempts to achieve "external balance") we
expect hi to be positive. In the analyses below it will be
assumed that 1 + h 1 > 0 and that 1 + hi - h 2 > 0, which will
hold for reasonable policy designs. 7 Discretionary open market
operations that are not motivated by currency flows or interest
rate movements can be interpreted as exogenous changes in TC •
Foreigners are assumed to have an infinitely elastic supply of
(and demand for) securities denominated in foreign currency at
a given rate of interest r*. We assume that foreigners neither
demand nor supply securities or deposits denominated in
domestic currency. These assumptions reflect the design of
Swedish capital controls. In principle, capital controls also
prohibit the pUblic (i.e., private households and non-bank
firms) from taking positions in foreign-currency securities for
"speculative purposes". However, private foreign borrowing has
been permitted and even encouraged as a means of financing
Sweden's current account (or, rather, the government budget)
deficits, and little seems to prevent the private net foreign
debt from being changed in response to interest and exchange
rate movements. Since the permissions for foreign borrowing are
related to the individual firms' (expected) exports and
imports, some measure(s) of foreign trade should probably be
included in the pUblic's asset demand functions. This may also
be motivated by the existence of ordinary trade credits which
7
If there is complete sterilization of movements in
reserves, hi = -1 and h 2 = O. In the case of complete
sterilization of the private currency flow, h 1 = h 2 = -1.
If, on the other hand, open market operations aim at
"external balance" we might have h 1 > o. If the balance is
specified in terms of foreign exchange reserves (the private
currency flow) h 2 = 0 (h 2 = h 1 ) . Herring and Marston (1977)
discuss how the sterilization coefficient is related to the
weights given to internal and external balance.
- 56 -
may (at least in part) be little affected by short term
movements in asset returns. 8
If we let FP denote the private sector's net foreign assets, it
must be the case that
(2.16)
and that
(2.17)
where CAB is the (exogenous) value of cumulated current account
surpluses (including capital gains and losses due to exchange
rate changes).
From the balance sheets (2.3) - (2.6) and the definitions of FP
(2.16) and R (2.17), we can express the private sector's net
financial wealth as:
w
B + CAB.
(2.18)
The accumulated government deficit B is assumed to be
exogenously determined, along with the government's net
holdings of foreign-currency securities Fg and its supply of
domestic securities T.
In this model there are three assets with exogenous or
predetermined returns - required reserves ("high powered
money", which yield zero return), deposits (which yield r D),
and foreign-currency securities (which yield r*). The only
endogenously determined interest rate is that on domestic
securities, r. The equilibrium condition for the domestic
8
The need for financing of trade deficits and surpluses is
the reason why transactions in the forward market are
permitted. Although in principle restricted by trade
volumes, these transactions can actively respond to changes
in interest rates, spot and forward exchange rates, etc.
- 57 -
securities market can be written as
T.
(2.19)
Alternatively, we may, as Englund, Horngren and viotti (1985),
choose to define the equilibrium in terms of the reserves
market:
(2.20)
The expression on the R.H.S. is the (banks') demand for
reserves. The (CB's) supply of reserves on the L.H.S. is
derived from the CB's balance sheet (2.4), and from the
expression for R (2.17). 9
Equilibrium also requires the market for forward foreign
exchange to be in equilibrium. The net supply on this market
(i.e., the net sales of forward foreign currency) is assumed to
be governed by the following conditions:
(banks)
(2.21)
(public)
(2.22)
(foreigners)
(2.23)
where qP(.) and qf(.) are the supply functions of domestic and
foreign "speculators and traders", i.e., agents who do not
(necessarily) match their operations on the forward market with
corresponding operations in the securities markets. It is
p
f
P
f
10
assumed that Q1' q1 < 0, and that Q2' Q2 > o.
9
(2.20) can be derived by sUbstitution of the balance
sheets identities (2.3) plus (2.5) - (2.6) and the
definition of wealth (2.18) into (2.19).
10 If domestic and foreign investors should be symmetrically
modelled, it would be natural to allow the latter to invest
in "covered" foreign-currency securities, i.e., to match
(some of) their purchases of foreign securities with
Some discussion of (2.21) ~ (2@23) may be
The net
supplies are expressed in terms of foreign currency, which
seems to be a natural normalization since we are talking about
the market for forward foreign exchange (although it could just
as well be described in terms of net demands for forward
domestic currency). The banks' supply of forward foreign
currency stems entirely from their demand for foreign~currency
securities, which - due to capital controls - has to be
completely covered. Note that it is the assumption of imperfect
sUbstitutability between domestic and covered foreign-currency
securities that gives the banks some latitude for active
portfolio management (cf. (2.12) and (2.13». As to the supply
of forward foreign exchange from the public, we see that there
is a "speculative" supply over and above the supply which is
derived from the demand for covered foreign-currency
securities. The option for speculation in the forward market is
a meaningful addition to the opportunity set only insofar as
domestic and covered foreign-currency securities are not
perfect sUbstitutes. In the case of foreigners, things are
different. Since they are assumed not (to be allowed) to have
any holdings of domestic securities, the forward market is the
only alternative for them if they want to speculate about
changes in the exchange rate.
The CB is assumed to have an exogenously determined net supply
of forward foreign exchange, Q.11 Hence, equilibrium in the
forward market is fulfilled if
corresponding sales of foreign currency on the forward
market. This would imply that a securities demand function,
"e ) say, should be .
.
.
f * (r * , r * + fp - S
1ncluded
1n Q f • It 15
immediately seen that this would affect the analysis only
.
. rare
*
1nsofar
as f *
f 2* and as exogenous changes 1n
1 ~ considered.
11 It may seem inconsistent to specify a reaction function for
TC while assuming that Fg and Q can be treated as exogenous
variables. The qualitative results that follow do not,
however, depend on these assumptions.
~
59 -
Assuming that the expected as well as the actual development of
the exchange rate can be treated as exogenously determined, the
portfolio balance model can be reduced to two equations (2.19) or (2020), plus (2.24) - that determine the interest
rate on domestic securities r and the forward premium on
foreign exchange fp.12 The roles of exchange rate dynamics and
expectations for asset market equilibrium are analyzed in
Chapter 3.
In Figure 1, TT gives the combinations of rand fp that are
consistent with equilibrium in the domestic securities market
(or, equivalently, in the reserves market). TT has a positive
slope, since an increase in the forward premium lowers the
demand for domestic securities, and thus puts upward pressure
on the domestic interest rate. (A formal analysis is given in
the appendix.) In analogy, QQ gives the combinations of rand
fp that are consistent with equilibrium in the forward market.
An increase in r will lower the demand for uncovered and
covered foreign securities. A decreased demand for covered
securities is associated with a decreased supply of foreign
currency on the forward market, which implies that the forward
premi~m
goes up along with r.
12 Although exchange rate expectations and levels are kept
exogenous in our analysis, the portfolio balance framework
is, of course, applicable also to the case of flexible
rates; see, e.g., Genberg (1981) and Obstfeld (1983)& In a
dynamic analysis one would have to take account of the fact
that supplies and demands on the forward market today give
rise to demands and supplies on the spot market in the
future, and of the endogeneity of wealth, and, in
particUlar, expectations. See Driskill and McCafferty (1982)
and Eaton and Turnovsky (1984).
r
fp
Figure 1:
Equilibrium
Figure 2:
Open market operation
r
1
Q/
r
I
I
I
I
I
fp
Q
I
/
I
L.
/
/
I
/
~------------------fp
Figure 3:
Forward market intervention
- 61 -
2.4
MONETARY POLICY AND CAPITAL FLOWS
In this section we will use the portfolio balance model to
analyze the relation between monetary policy and capital flows,
and, in particular, between capital mobility and monetary
autonomy. section 2.4.1 uses the model as it stands, which
means that capital is imperfectly mobile in the sense that
domestic securities and covered foreign-currency securities are
treated as imperfect substitutes. The case of perfect capital
mobility is studied in section 2.4.2. Some implications for
pOlicy are discussed in section 2.4.3.
2.4.1
Imperfect capital mobility
A discretionary open market operation in the form of an
exogenous increase in the CB's holdings of domestic securities
(dT c > 0) will shift TT downwards, as in Figure 2. As the CB's
demand for domestic securities increases and the domestic
interest rate is lowered, the private demand for
foreign-currency securities increases and there is a net
capital outflow. Part of the purchases of foreign securities
are covered, and the associated increase in the supply of
forward foreign currency puts downward pressure on the forward
premium; the tendency towards excess demand in the domestic·
securities market is thus strengthened, and the decrease in the
domestic interest rate is reinforced.
The same effect can be achieved by a properly sized decrease in
the net supply of treasury bills and a corresponding decrease
in the government's net holdings of foreign-currency
securities, dT = dFg < 0 (a so-called sterilized intervention).
More precisely, it can be shown (cf. the appendix) that
dr = --g
dF
[1 + h
1
- h ]dr
---.
2 d~c
(2.25)
As long as the monetary authorities do not counteract their own
-
62 -
operations by systematic sterilization (i.e., as long as h 2
ht), or if there is no systematic sterilization of capital
flows whatsoever (i.e., if h 1 = h 2 = 0), sterilized
intervention and conventional open market operations are
equivalent in terms of interest rate effects. By inspection of
C
g
(2.20) it is directly seen that (opposite) changes in T and F
will have equivalent effects, as long as Fg is not an argument
in h(.).
Alternatively, the monetary authorities may want to affect the
domestic interest rate through operations in the forward
foreign exchange market. A sale of forward foreign currency (dO
> 0) shifts QQ upward, as in Figure 3. When the private and
banking sectors buy foreign currency forward from the CB, these
purchases are, in part, covered through decreased net holdings
of foreign-currency securities. The associated capital inflow
and decline in the domestic interest rate reinforces the
negative effect on the forward premium.
Even if government foreign borrowing (decreases in Fg ) and
official sales of forward foreign currency (increases in Q) are
alternatives to conventional expansionary open market
operations (increases in TC ) in the sense that these operations
all lower the interest rate on domestic securities, there are
differences with respect to the effects on the foreign exchange
reserves and on the private currency flow. Expansionary open
market operations (dT c > 0) create net outflows on the private
capital balance (dFP > 0) and lower the foreign exchange
reserves (dR < 0). In the case of sterilized intervention, the
outflow of private capital is more than offset by government
foreign borrowing (dFg < 0), so that the level of foreign
exchange reserves increases. Official sales on the forward
market (dQ > 0) also increase the foreign exchange reserves,
but through a positive effect on the private capital balance
(dFP < 0).
One measure of the degree of monetary autonomy that has been
-
63 -
used in empirical work by, e.g., Kouri and Porter (1974) and
Herring and Marston (1977), is the offset coefficient. It is
defined as the extent to which an initial increase in the
supply of high powered money, e.g., an open market operation,
exceeds the ultimate change. In terms of our model the offset
coefficient can be defined as:
(2.26)
It was argued in section 2.2 that a reasonable
operationalization of the concept monetary autonomy would be to
identify it with the extent to which monetary pOlicy affects
the domestic interest rate (at a given exchange rate). Since
1-c is proportional to dr/dT c , an operationalization that
relies on the offset coefficient is not inconsistent with the
argument in section 2.2. We will return to the offset
coefficient below, when analyzing the consequences of perfect
capital mobility and when discussing some empirical studies.
We also argued above that one measure of the degree of capital
mobility is the degree of substitutability between domestic
securities and covered foreign-currency securities. Let us
assume that
_f b1 -
~
To
(2.27)
It can then be shown (cfe the appendix) that
(2.28)
In other words, a higher degree of SUbstitutability between
domestic and covered foreign-currency securities lowers the
response of the domestic interest rate to open market
operations (when TC goes up, r goes down by less when, is high
than when. is low). In this sense, a higher degree of capital
- 64 -
mobility is associated with a lower degree of monetary
autonomy.
It is not hard to get an intuitive understanding of why a high
degree of substitution between domestic and covered foreign
securities implies a low degree of monetary autonomy. The
forward market in fact creates an endogenous supply of assets
with a safe nominal return in domestic currency. (A purchase of
a foreign security coupled with a sale of forward foreign
.
currency y1elds
the safe return r * + fp.) If these assets are
close substitutes to securities denominated in domestic
currency, the return on the latter will be little affected by
the actions of the monetary authorities.
In terms of Figure 1, TT gets steeper while QQ gets flatter as
the degree of capital mobility increases. In the limiting case
of perfect mobility, i.e., perfect substitutability between
domestic and covered foreign-currency securities, both
schedules converge to a slope of 1, which implies covered
interest parity. This condition, however, only establishes a
relation between rand fp. In order to determine how the level
of r (and fp) is affected by monetary pOlicy under perfect
capital mobility, we have to reformulate our model for the case
of perfect SUbstitutability between domestic and covered
foreign-currency securities.
2.4.2
Perfect capital mobility
Perfect SUbstitutability between domestic and covered
foreign-currency securities means that separate demand
functions for these assets cannot be defined. For instance, the
pUblic's demand functions now refer to deposits, uncovered
foreign-currency securities, and securities with a safe nominal
return in domestic currency (= r = r* + fp), i.e., domestic
securities or covered foreign-currency securities. Under the
condition of perfect capital mobility, asset demand functions
may thus be respecified as follows:
- 65 -
D
d-[ r * + fp, r * + se, r D,
FU
-u[
f r* +
TP = tp[r*
+
s]
Ae
fp, r * + S , r D,
s]
Ae
r * + S , r D,
s]
fpI
(2.29)
I
I
(2.30)
I
(2.31)
where "_" is used to distinguish asset demands under perfect
capital mobility from those under imperfect mobility.
When domestic and covered foreign-currency securities are
perfect substitutes, the banks play no important role in the
portfolio balance model. Deposits are infinitely elastically
supplied at the predetermined level of r D; required reserves
amount to aD; and the remainder, (l-a)D, is invested in
nominally safe securities:
-b
T
- RB = (l-a)D.
(2.32)
The equilibrium of the portfolio balance model is now given by
one condition in one endogenous variable (r or fp). It may be
formulated as
[Tb
- RB +
TP
+ TO + g(.) - T] + SqP(.) + sqf(.) + SQ
=
O.
(2.33)
The term within brackets is the domestic excess demand for
securities with a nominally safe return in domestic currency.
This demand is satisfied through purchases of foreign-currency
securities and corresponding sales of foreign currency on the
forward foreign exchange market. This net supply on the forward
market which derives from the demand for covered
foreign-currency securities must, just as in the case of
imperfect capital mobility, be matched by a corresponding net
demand from foreign and domestic "speculators" (inclUding the
CB).
.- 66 . . .
The private sector's total net holdings of foreign-currency
securities, FP , are given by the aggregate of uncovered
holdings, FU , and covered holdings, which in turn are given by
the term within brackets in (2.33). It is obvious that the CB's
open market operations and sales of forward foreign currency
have direct effects on private capital flows. An autonomous
decrease in the CB's holdings of domestic securities (dT c < 0)
lowers the private demand for covered foreign-currency
securities and creates a corresponding inflow of capital. Just
as it makes no sense to sterilize currency flows in the form of
government purchases or sales of foreign-currency securities
(changes in F g ), it makes little sense to counteract covered
purchases or sales of foreign securities which stem directly
from changes in Te • For simplicity, let us assume that the CB,
in the case of perfect capital mobility, chooses to sterilize
changes in currency flows associated with the current account
or uncovered purchases of foreign securities only, i.eo, that
the reaction function can be respecified as
(2.34)
where ill > ... 1.
Using the private sector's balance sheet,
TP = W ....
FU
.....
D,
(2.35)
the balance sheets for the government (2.3) and the banks
(2.32), the definition of wealth (2.18), plus the behavioral
functions (2.29) ~ (2.30) and (2.34), we may rewrite (2.33) as
ad ( . ) .
(2.36)
.... 67 .....
This equilibrium condition can be obtained by summation of the
two equilibrium conditions for the general case of imperfect
capital mobility, (2.20) and (2.24), with suitable revisions of
asset demand and reaction functions. That the original
equilibrium conditions may be aggregated is, of course, due to
the fact that the aggregate of domestic and covered foreign
securities can be viewed as the stock of one single composite
asset.
From (2.36) and (2834) it is easily seen that
(2.37)
and that
(2.38)
Perfect capital mobility thus does not imply that there is no
monetary autonomy (since dr/dT c < 0). It does imply, of course,
that open market operations and interventions in spot and
forward exchange markets have the same effects on the interest
rate as on the forward premium (i.e., dr = dfp). Furthermore,
these different operations will have identical effects on the
interest rate, with reasonable assumptions about the CB's
behavior (cf. (2.38».
As to the effects from monetary policy on private capital
flows, it should first of all be noted that private total net
holdings of foreign-currency securities, FP , are given by the
aggregate of uncovered holdings, FU , and covered holdings,
which in turn - by (2.33) - must equal -(sqP + sqf + SO). That
is,
(2.39)
and
- 68 -
(2.40)
In the empirical literature, it is fairly common to estimate
the offset coefficient from reduced form regression analysis of
private capital flows. In the case of perfect capital mobility,
the offset coefficient is given by
1 - a d- 1 dr c
dT
c -
(2.41)
which implies that
dr
dT c
=
(ad )-1 (1 - c).
1
(2.42)
The degree of monetary autonomy is thus closely related to (one
minus) the offset coefficient. From (2.37) and (2.41) we have
that
c
=
(2.43)
which implies that dFP/dT C = c if h 1 = g1 = o. Reduced form
regression analysis of private capital flows can thus only be
expected to reveal the true offset coefficient if the CB's
actions are completely autonomous.
If domestic and foreign-currency securities are perfect
substitutes on an uncovered basis, an open market operation
will be completely offset by private capital flows (c = 1 since
f~ = --). Whether monetary autonomy is measured in terms of the
interest rate effect, given by (2.37), or by the ultimate
effect on the volume of high-powered money, given by one minus
the offset coefficient, perfect sUbstitutability on an
- 69 -
uncovered basis implies that there is no monetary autonomy.
Note, however, that the offset coefficient may be unity even if
f~ is finite, if the demand for money is interest-inelastic (d 1
= 0), or if the discount window is completely open (g1 = 00). It
is thus not generally true that the higher the offset
coefficient is, the less will the scope for monetary pOlicy be.
This is just a reflection of the fact that the offset
coefficient is not a "deep parameter".
2.4.3
Policy implications
Before looking at the empirical literature, let us briefly
discuss the conclusions for policy that can be drawn from the
portfolio balance analysis in this chapter.
As to the role of capital mobility, we have seen that the
higher t~e degree of sUbstitutability between domestic and
foreign securities, the lower is the degree of monetary
autonomy. However, perfect sUbstitutability between domestic
and covered foreign securities does not imply that there is no
autonomy, whereas perfect sUbstitutability on an uncovered
basis does. In the latter case, there is an infinitely elastic
supply of securities (denominated in foreign currency) which
are perfectly substitutable for domestic securities, and the
return on the latter can therefore not be affected by the
monetary authorities in a small open economy. In the case of
perfect sUbstitutability on a covered basis, however, this is
not the case; as long as forward foreign currency is not
infinitely elastically supplied, the monetary authorities can
affect the forward premium and thus the nominally safe return
in domestic currency.
In principle, sterilization of private capital flows may
increase the scope for monetary policy. Government purchases or
sales of foreign securities should, presumably, not be
sterilized. This argument rests on the assumption that official
foreign borrowing or lending is an ingredient in a purposeful
-
70
~
stabilization policy that should not be counteracted by
monetary authorities. An analogous argument can be made to the
effect that, in the case of perfect capital mobility, covered
purchases or sales of foreign-currency securities by private
agents should not be sterilized, if they are directly caused by
open market operations. One may, of course, argue that private
capital flows which are induced by policy shocks should never
be sterilized. In practice, it may be hard to determine the
extent to which private capital flows should be sterilized. It
is even hard to imagine why sterilization should be necessary.
The monetary authorities can achieve independent interest~rate
and foreign-exchange-reserves targets by suitable combinations
of changes in TO, F9 , and Q, and the effects of other
autonomous disturbances may be damped (or reinforced) by the
supply of borrowed reserves.
If sterilization should nevertheless be seriously considered,
it is important to note that sterilization of (uncovered)
purchases or sales of foreign-currency securities only has a
limited effect on capital flows. The effect on the interest
rate/forward premium and on the private capital flows from any
autonomous disturbance depends on the net effects on the demand
for uncovered foreign-currency securities and the supply of
forward foreign currency (cf. (2.37) and (2.40». The
foreigners' supply of forward foreign exchange may be
interpreted as their (excess) demand for domestic securities,
and the supply function qf C.) plays the same role in the
equilibrating mechanism as would a securities demand function.
This indicates that the restriction on foreigners' holdings of
domestic securities is of no consequence to the degree of
monetary autonomy in the case of perfect capital mobility.
Kouri (1976) notes that "in the absence of the 'default risk'
or transaction costs the forward market does not expand the
investment opportunity set" (p. 6). We have seen that the
forward market may make capital controls ineffective. In
particUlar, the forward market expands the investment
- 71 -
opportunity set of foreign investors, who are prohibited from
holding Swedish securities. This result is not inconsistent
with Kouri's conclusion, since one may interpret the capital
controls as imposing infinitely large transaction costs on
international trade in a certain type of asset. 13
The Swedish monetary authorities have more or less officially
declared that they are concerned with private currency flows
rather than total changes in foreign exchange reserves, and the
supply of borrowed reserves, rather than sterilization, is used
to stabilize target variables. Recently, operations in the
forward market seem to have gained importance. These
observations are easily interpreted in terms of the portfolio
balance model. The restriction on foreign holdings of domestic
securities, however, can only be justified insofar as domestic
and covered foreign-currency securities are treated as
imperfect substitutes. As we shall see below, available
evidence indicates that capital is perfectly mobile, and hence,
that the capital controls are of no consequence for the degree
of monetary autonomy. The latter is determined by the degree of
substitutability between domestic and uncovered foreign
securities and - which amounts to the same thing under perfect
capital mobility - by the elasticity of the supply of forward
foreign currency. The conditions on the forward foreign
exchange market are thus crucial for the degree of monetary
autonomy and, in particular, for the effectiveness of capital
controls.
Finally, let us comment on the proposition put forward by
Franzen (1986) - see also SOU 1985:52, ch. 17 - and Johansson
(1985), that foreign borrowing which is covered in the forward
market does not affect the foreign exchange reserves. This
proposition can be translated into the hypothesis that private
13 In analogy with Kouri's statement, the addition of a
Eurocurrency market does not expand the investment
opportunity set if there is a well-functioning forward
market; cf. Herring and Marston (1977). The "Eurokron"
market is described by Julin (1987).
-
72 -
capital flows consist entirely of changes in uncovered
positions, i.e., that dFP = dFu • In general, however, any
autonomous disturbance will give rise to capital flows that
involve changes in both uncovered and covered positions. It can
be verified from (2.39) that dFP = dF u if the supply of forward
foreign currency (from the public and foreigners) is completely
inelastic, but this must be considered an extreme case. At
least, I am aware of no empirical support of this hypothesis.
2.5
EMPIRICAL EVIDENCE
In order to get a deeper understanding of the scope for
monetary policy, one would like to have empirical estimates of
all structural equations in the portfolio balance model, i.e.,
of all the parameters of asset demand and reaction functions.
Ideally, one would also like to have estimates of the
structural equations of the real side of the economy. Needless
to say, such information is not available.
Empirical studies of monetary autonomy may be grouped in three
categories. First, there are estimates of single equations from
portfolio balance models, such as the demand function(s) for
foreign securities and the CB's reaction function(s). Second,
there are studies of reduced forms aimed at estimating
partiCUlar combinations of the underlying parameters, such as
the offset coefficient. Third, there are what we may call
atheoretical studies which examine the empirical evidence on
parity conditions such as eIP and UIP. Taken together, these
studies may provide some indirect evidence on the scope for
monetary policy. There are no a priori reasons to view one
approach as generally superior to the others, but they should
be viewed as complementary. The usefulness of the various
approaches also depends on the underlying structure of the
economy, i.e., on the unknown properties which are the reason
for the empirical studies in question. It is not, e.g.,
meaningfUl to try to estimate the structural equations of the
portfolio balance model unless there is at least some degree of
-
73 -
monetary autonomy; if domestic and foreign-currency securities
are perfect substitutes it will not be possible to identify
separate demand functions for those assets. The atheoretical
parity tests may reveal whether capital mobility and/or asset
sUbstitutability is perfect or not, but do not give us any
information on the degrees of mobility and substitutability if
they are found to be less than perfect. Reduced form estimation
of the offset coefficient allows for perfect substitutability
as a special case. If the monetary authorities' actions are
completely autonomous, the offset coefficient may be estimated
from a reduced form regression of total private capital flows,
and no separation of covered and uncovered transactions is
necessary.
Kouri and Porter (1974) present some results from reduced form
regressi.on analyses of West Germany's capital account
(quarterly data, 1960-1970). They assume that the eB's holdings
of domestic securities, Te , can be treated as an exogenous
variable, i.eo, that hi = h 2 = o. One result is that it seems
as if open market operations are largely neutralized by
movements in short term capital flows - the offset coefficient
is estimated to .72. Following Kouri and Porter, Grassman and
Herin (1976) estimate the corresponding coefficient using
quarterly Swedish data from 1966-1974 and arrive at a point
estimate of .46. These results thus indicate that there may
have been a higher degree of monetary autonomy in Sweden than
in Germany during the period under consideration.
It is questionable, however, whether the Swedish and German
central banks' operations during the 1960's and 1970's can
safely be treated as exogenous. Obstfeld (1980b) estimates the
structural equations of a portfolio balance model for West
Germany on quarterly data from the 1960's, and finds evidence
of almost complete sterilization. His estimate of the
sterilization coefficient (hi) is not significantly different
from -1. Similar results are reported by Herring and Marston
- 74 -
(1977).14 For comparison with the results obtained by Kouri and
Porter (1974), Obstfeld (1982) also runs a reduced form
regression on German capital flows, taking the endogeneity of
TC into account by employing the method of two-stage least
squares. As shown in section 2.4.2, however, the reduced form
coefficient on TC gives information about the offset
coefficient only in the case of no sterilization. Obstfeld
finds the coefficient to be insignificantly different from
zero, and explains the difference between his result and that
of Kouri-Porter to simultaneity bias in the latters' estimate;
but Obstfeld himself apparently overlooks the effect that
sterilization has on the definition of the offset coefficient.
Obstfeld (1983) reports that the conclusions about the German
CB's reactions are not much affected if the period of a
flexible exchange rate is examined. Using monthly data from
1975-1981 he still gets a sterilization coefficient not
significantly different from -1. Simulations based on the
portfolio balance model reveal, however, that the quantitative
effects on the exchange rat'e from sterilized intervention may
have been negligible. Genberg (1981) reviews several studies of
German data from the 1970's and concludes that the evidence of
the effectiveness of sterilization is very weak.
Genberg (1976) estimates a central bank reaction function on
quarterly Swedish data from 1950-1968 and finds the
sterilization coefficient to be slightly (but not
significantly) less than -1 in absolute terms. Genberg
nevertheless chooses to interpret the negative correlation
between the domestic and foreign components of the monetary
base as an indication that monetary policy has been completely
offset by private capital flows. Lybeck, Haggstrom and Jarnhall
(1979) fit both structural and reduced form equations to
14 Herring and Marston
the CB's operations
when estimating the
study considers the
the private capital
and Obstfeld explicitly take account of
in the forward foreign exchange market
reaction functions, but only the latter
direct effects of these operations on
balance (cf. (2.39) above).
-
75 -
quarterly Swedish capital flows for the period 1967-1974, and
find some evidence of sterilization. As to the size of the
estimated offset coefficient, the results are inconclusive.
Black (1983) uses monthly data from 1963-1979 to estimate the
reaction functions of the CB's in ten different countries,
including Sweden and West Germany. Sweden and Germany are both
found to "give at least moderate attention to external
variables" (p. 206), which is not consistent with complete
sterilization. Germany appears to have put more emphasis on
external variables during the period of floating than earlier,
and to have put more weight on external balance than Sweden.
Although the robustness of Black's results can be questioned
(cf. the critical comments on Black's paper by Leiderman and
Stockman), the conclusions are definitely in line with common
prejudices, at least as far as Sweden and Germany are
concerned.
A common result in empirical studies of private capital flows
is the failure to establish any significant influence from
interest rates - see, e.g., Kouri and Porter (1974), Cumby
(1983), Hirdman, Nessen and Vredin (1986), and Hirdman (1987).
This may be indicative of high degrees of monetary autonomy,
and can in principle be explained as a result of low
SUbstitutability between domestic and foreign securities, or of
an extremely successful monetary policy where the interest rate
is managed so as to stabilize capital flows. 15 However, the
result may also be due to measurement problems. Besides the
problem of measuring (exchange rate) expectations, it is worth
noting that failure to control for systematic changes in the
CB's supply of forward foreign currency might create problems
(cf. (2.39». Note first that a regression analysis of FP - Q
against r - r* or fp will give an estimate of the total
interest sensitivity of the demand for uncovered foreign-currency securities and the supply of forward foreign
15 Formally, if r is used to control FP , FP may appear to be
exogenous w.r.t. r; see, e.g., Sims (1977).
-
76 -
currency. More importantly, if data on Q are not available which often is the case, in practice - we face the traditional
problem of omitted variables. The parameter estimates of the
private securities demand and forward exchange supply functions
will be inefficient and biased. 16 JUdging from the study by
Hirdman (1987), there seems to be little hope of aChieving
useful empirical estimates of the interest-sensitivity of
capital flows without detailed information about the forward
foreign exchange market.
Following the break-down of the international system of rigidly
fixed exchange rates, there has been a shift in the focus of
empirical research in the field of international monetary
economics. In particular, it has been more popUlar to estimate
(reduced form and atheoretical) exchange rate equations than
(structural) asset demand equations. The two approaches should,
nevertheless, be viewed as complementary. One may, e.g., view
direct tests of parity conditions such as eIP and UIP as the
first step in an empirical identification of a structural
portfolio balance model.
Using monthly data from 1975-1984, McPhee (1984) and Englund,
McPhee and viotti (1985) present some evidence that the Swedish
credit market has become more integrated with the world market.
Specifically, deviations from elP between one-month krona and
Eurodollar interest rates have been much smaller since 1980
than earlier. At least since 1982, the deviations have been
small enough to be explained by normal transaction costs.
Similar results are presented by Frenkel and Levich (1981), who
examine the deviations from elP among treasury bills of
different or1g1n and among different Euromarket securities,
including assets denominated in German marks. (Data are weekly,
and cover the years 1973 - 1979.) These findings are consistent
with the hypothesis of perfect capital mobility, but do not
imply that there is no monetary autonomy, or that domestic
16
Equivalently, the estimates reflect the net effects of the
behavior of private agents and the monetary authorities.
- 77 -
(Swedish and German) and foreign-currency securities are
perfect substitutes also on an uncovered basis, i.e., that UIP
holds.
The most common way to investigate whether UIP holds is to test
whether forward exchange rates are unbiased predictors of
future spot rates, under the maintained hypothesis of eIP. 17
Cumby and Obstfeld (1984) investigate dollar exchange rates
using weekly data from 1976-1981. Although unbiasedness can be
rejected in four out of five cases, it cannot be rejected for
the u.s. dollar/German mark exchange rate. However, Fama
(1984), who studies more dollar exchange rates for a longer
period (1973-1982) rejects unbiasedness in all (nine) cases,
including the dollar/mark relation. Oxelheim (1985) studies
quarterly data on krona exchange rates for the period
1974-1984, and is not able to reject that the forward premia
(on the krona in relation to the u.s. dollar or the German
mark) are unbiased predictors of the depreciation of the krona.
On the basis of the information reviewed in this section, one
may be tempted to conclude that even if the degree of monetary
autonomy in Sweden was not lower than in Germany during the
1960's and early 1970's, recent UIP tests indicate that Sweden
may now have a more limited autonomy (if any) than Germany. To
the extent that one believes that German monetary policy, in
contrast to the policies of a small economy like Sweden, can be
expected to influence world market interest rates, this
conclusion is of course strengthened. However, the estimated
exchange rate equations have to be interpreted with caution.
First, forward premia are usually not very informative when
forecasting future exchange rate changes, irrespectively of
whether they are found to be biased predictors or not. Exchange
rate changes generally show a much higher variance than forward
premia. This also implies that the estimated coefficients in
the regression analyses are SUbject to great uncertainty, and
17 Note that (2.1) and (2.2) together imply that se = fp. The
literature on UIP is discussed more thoroughly in Chapter 3.
- 78 -
that they, therefore, may be sensitive even to minor changes in
specification and/or estimation period. (Compare, e.g., the
Cumby-Obstfeld (1984) and Fama (1984) papers referred to
above.) Second, regression equations should be formulated and
interpreted with reference to actual exchange rate policies. A
reduced form equation or parity condition which may seem
sensible to investigate using data from one exchange rate
regime may not be relevant under another system. Specifically,
we suspect that Sweden's exchange rate policy, which since 1977
is based on a particular official currency basket index (cf.
Chapter 1), has implications to the effect that one should use
different models when studying data from the pre- and post-1977
periods (and when studying Swedish and German data). We will
examine the Swedish case more closely in Chapter 4, after
having reviewed the theoretical and empirical arguments on
international asset sUbstitutability in Chapter 3.
2.6
SUMMARY
The purpose of this chapter has been to carry the discussion
about capital mobility and monetary policy in Chapter 1 a bit
further. It has been argued that capital mobility may be
identified with the degree of sUbstitutability between domestic
securities and foreign securities which are covered in the
forward foreign exchange market. Perfect capital mobility is
thus taken to mean that the covered interest differential is
zero, i.e., that CIP holds. It has also been argued that
monetary autonomy may be taken to mean the possibility to
affect the domestic interest rate through, e.g., open market
operations, given a specific (realized and expected) value of
the exchange rate.
In order to analyze the relation between capital mobility and
monetary autonomy I have formulated a portfolio balance model
that incorporates the forward foreign exchange market. While
many simplifying assumptions have been made, the model still
captures important institutional features of the Swedish credit
-
79 -
market, such as capital controls and the monetary authorities'
reaction functions. A principal finding is that increased
capital mobility implies lower monetary autonomy, although
perfect capital mobility does not imply that there is no
autonomy. Perfect capital mobility means that domestic and
covered foreign-currency securities are perfect sUbstitutes,
and that the demand for nominally safe securities in domestic
currency may be satisfied through purchases of domestic
securities or of foreign securities which are coupled with a
sale of foreign currency on the forward market. The forward
market thus creates an endogenous supply of securities with a
safe return in domestic currency; consequently, this return may
be little affected by the actions of the monetary authorities.
Unless the supply of forward foreign currency is infinitely
elastic, however, monetary policies will have some effect on
the forward premium and the domestic interest rate.
In some earlier models, the supply of forward foreign currency
has been treated as completely inelastic. I am aware of no
empirical support of this hypothesis. However, empirical
studies do suggest that domestic and covered foreign-currency
securities are perfect substitutes, i.e., that elP holds. This
implies that a restriction against foreign holdings of domestic
securities is ineffective. Foreigners' demand for domestic
securities can be satisfied through purchases of
foreign-currency securities, coupled with sales of forward
foreign currency (purchases of forward Swedish currency).
There does not seem to exist any strong evidence on the actual
degree of monetary autonomy. Regression analyses of structural
asset demand functions typically suffer from a neglect of the
forward foreign exchange market, and reduced form estimations
of "offset coefficients" have not paid sufficient attention to
the CB's reaction function(s).
If domestic securities are considered perfect substitutes to
uncovered foreign-currency securities, i.e., if UIP holds,
-
80 -
there is no monetary autonomy in a small open economy. Unlike
ClP, UIP cannot be brought about through arbitrage activities,
since uncovered borrowing and lending is risky. The theoretical
and empirical evidence of the importance of risk for
international interest rate differentials is the sUbject of
Chapter 3.
- 81 -
Appendix
In this appendix, the portfolio balance model set out in
section 2.3 is analyzed formally.
Let A denote the determinant of the equation system given by
(2.20) and (2.24). It is easily verified that
(A1)
The assumption of gross sUbstitutability ensures that A > 0, as
long as 1 + h 1 > O.
The slope of TT in Figure 1 is given by
I
dr
dfp TT
(A2)
which is positive if 1 + hi > 0, f~ + f; > - f~ and the
absolute value of d 2 is small. (If the demand for money
decreases very much when the forward premium goes up (i.e., if
d 2 is large), the domestic interest rate may have to fall in
order to clear the domestic securities - and reserves market.) The slope of QQ is given by
I
dr
dfp QQ
It can be seen that
(A3)
- 82 -
I
I
dr
dr
dfp TT - dfp QQ
which is negative, so that TT is flatter than QQ, under the
assumptions made above.
Differentiation of (2.20) and (2.24) gives the following
results (under the assumptions made above, and assuming 1 + h 1 h2
> 0):
dr
- - =-
(A5)
dT c
(AB)
dr
(A9)
dQ
(A10)
Defining 9 as in (2.27),
2(AS)-2(Sq~+sq~)[-ad2-(1+hl)(f~-Sq~-Sq~)] >
O.
(All)
It can also be shown that
-
83 -
and that
(A13)
i.e., that TT gets steeper while QQ gets flatter as • gets
larger. It is easily seen from (A2) - (A3) that as • ~ 00,
- 84 -
REFERENCES
Aliber, R.Z. (1972), "Uncertainty, Currency Areas, and the
Exchange Rate System", Economica, Vol. 39, pp. 432-441.
Aliber, R.Z. (1978), "The Integration of National Financial
Markets: A Review of Theory and Findings",
Weltwirtschaftliches Archiv, Vol. 114, pp. 448-480.
Black, S.W. (1973), International Money Markets and Flexible
Exchange Rates, Princeton studies in International
Finance, No. 32, International Finance Section, Princeton
University.
Black, S.W. (1983), "The Use of Monetary Policy for Internal
and External Balance in Ten Industrial Countries", in
Frenkel, ed., Exchange Rates and International
Macroeconomics, University of Chicago Press/NBER, Chicago,
pp. 189-225.
Cumby, R.E. (1983), "Trade Credit, Exchange Controls, and
Monetary Independence: Evidence from the United Kingdom",
Journal of International Economics, Vol. 14, pp. 53-67.
Cumby, R.E. and M. Obstfeld (1983), "Capital Mobility and the
Scope for sterilizati~n: Mexico in the 1970's", in Aspe
Armella, Dornbusch, and Obstfeld, eds., Financial Policies
and the World Capital Market: The Problem of Latin
American Countries, University of Chicago Press/NBER,
Chicago, pp. 245-269.
Cumby, R.E. and M. Obstfeld (1984), "International
Interest-Rate and Price-Level Linkages under Flexible
Exchange Rates: A Review of Recent Evidence", in Bilson
and Marston, eds., Exchange Rate Theory and Practice,
University of Chicago Press/NBER, Chicago, pp. 121-151.
Dornbusch, R. (1980), Open Economy Macroeconomics, Basic Books.
Dornbusch, R. and P. Krugman (1976), "Flexible Exchange Rates
in the Short Run", Brookings Papers on Economic Activity,
pp. 537-575.
Driskill, R. and S. McCafferty (1982), "spot and Forward Rates
in a Stochastic Model of the Foreign Exchange Market",
Journal of International Economics, Vol. 12, pp. 313-331.
Eaton, J. and S. Turnovsky (1983), "Exchange Risk, Political
Risk, and Macroeconomic Equilibrium", American Economic
Review, Vol. 73, pp. 183-189.
- 85 -
Eaton, J. and S. Turnovsky (1984), "The Forward Exchange
Market, Speculation and Exchange Market Intervention,
Quarterly Journal of Economics, Vol. 99, pp. 45-69.
Englund, P., L. Horngren and S. viotti (1985), "A Short-Term
Model of the Swedish Money Market", Institute for
International Economic Studies, Seminar Paper No. 316,
University of stockholm.
Englund, P., S. McPhee and S. viotti (1985), "Ranteparitet
och ranteberoende" (Interest rate parity and interest rate
dependence), Ekonomisk Debatt, Vol. 13, pp. 275-288.
Fama, E.F. (1984), "Forward and spot Exchange Rates", Journal
of Monetary Economics, Vol. 14, pp. 319-338e
Frankel, J.A. (1983), "Monetary and Portfolio-Balance Models of
Exchange Rate Determination", in Bhandari and Putnam,
eds., Economic Interdependence and Flexible Exchange
Rates, MIT Press, pp. 84-115.
Franzen, T. (1986), "The Forward Exchange Market in Sweden",
Sveriges Riksbank Quarterly Review, 2/1986, pp. 16-25.
Frenkel, J.A. and R.M. Levich (1981), "Covered Interest
Arbitrage in the 1970's", Economics Letters, Vol. 8, pp.
267-274.
Frenkel, J.A. and M.L. Mussa (1981), "Monetary and Fiscal
Policies in an Open Economy", American Economic Review
Papers and Proceedings, Vol. 71 (May 1981), pp. 253-258.
Genberg, A.H. (1976), "Aspects of the Monetary Approach to
Balance of Payments Theory. An Empirical StUdy of Sweden",
in Frenkel and Johnson, eds., The Monetary Approach to the
Balance of Payments, University of Toronto Press, pp.
298-325.
Genberg, A.H. (1981), "Effects of Central Bank Intervention in
the Foreign Exchange Market", IMF Staff Papers, Vol. 28,
pp. 451-476.
Grassman, S. and J. Herin (1976), "De korta kapitalrorelsernas
bestamningsfaktorer" (Determinants of short-term capital
movements), section 3.3.1 in Den internationella
bakgrunden, SOU 1976:27, Allmanna Forlaget, Stockholm, pp.
233-239.
Henderson, D.W. (1977), "Modeling the Interdependence of
National Money and Capital Markets", American Economic
Review Papers and Proceedings, Vol. 67 (February 1977),
pp. 190-199.
- 86 -
Henderson, D.W. (1984), "Exchange Market Intervention
operations: Their Role in Financial Policy and Their
Effects", in Bilson and Marston, eds., Exchange Rate
Theory and Practice, University of Chicago Press/NBER,
Chicago, pp. 357-406.
Herring, R.J. and R.C. Marston (1977), National Monetary
Policies and International Financial Markets,
North-Holland, Amsterdam.
Hirdman, V. (1987), "The Stability and the Interest
Sensitivity of Swedish Short Term Capital Flows", Research
Report from the Economic Research Institute, stockholm
School of Economics.
Hirdman, V., M. Nessen and A. Vredin (1986), "Are capital flows
destabilizing?", Skandinaviska Enskilda Banken Quarterly
Review, 4/1986, pp. 120-128.
Horngren, L. (1986), On Monetary Policy and Interest Rate
Determination in an Open Economy, The Economic Research
Institute, stockholm School of Economics.
Johansson, P. (1985), "Kapitalrorelserna och penningpolitiken
i Finland" (Capital movements and monetary pOlicy in
Finland), paper presented at the Marstrand Meeting,
Denmark, 1985.
Julin, A. (1987), "Kartlaggning av Eurokronmarknaden" (A
Review of the Eurokron market"), mimeo, Sveriges Riksbank.
Kareken, J. and N. Wallace (1978), "International Monetary
Reform: The Feasible Alternatives", Federal Reserve Bank
of Minneapolis Quarterly Review, Summer 1978, pp. 2-7.
Kouri, P.J. (1976), "The Determinants of the Forward Premium",
Institute for International Economic Studies, Seminar
Paper No. 62, University of stockholm.
Kouri, P.J. and M.G. Porter (1974), "International Capital
Flows and Portfolio Equilibrium", Journal of Political
Economy, Vol. 82, pp. 443-468.
Laidler, D. (1986), "International Monetary Economics in Theory
and Practice", in J. Sargent, ed., Postwar Macroeconomic
Developments, University of Toronto Press, pp. 225-270.
Lybeck, J.A., J. Haggstrom and B. Jiirnhall (1979), "An
empirical comparison of four models of capital flows: OLS
and 2SLS estimation of the Branson, Genberg, Kouri and
Lybeck models", in Sawyer, ed., Modelling the
International Transmission Mechanism, North-Holland,
Amsterdam, pp. 387-412.
- 87 -
McPhee, S.E. (1984), "Covered Interest Parity in Swedish
Capital Markets, 1974-1984", mimeo, Stockholm School of
Economics.
Mundell, R.A. (1963), "Capital Mobility and Stabilization
policy under Fixed and Flexible Exchange Rates", Canadian
Journal of Economics and Political Science, Vol. 29, pp.
475-485.
Obstfeld, M. (1980a), "Imperfect Asset SUbstitutability and
Monetary Policy under Fixed Exchange Rates", Journal of
International Economics, Vol. 10, pp. 177-200.
Obstfeld, M. (1980b), "sterilization and the Offsetting Capital
Movements: Evidence from West Germany, 1960-1970", NBER
Working Paper No. 494.
Obstfeld, M. (1982), "Can We sterilize? Theory and Evidence",
American Economic Review Papers and Proceedings, Vol. 72
(May 1982), pp. 45-50.
Obstfeld, M. (1983), "Exchange Rates, Inflation, and the
sterilization Problem: Germany, 1975-1981", European
Economic Review, Vol. 21, pp. 161-189.
Oxelheim, L. (1985), International Financial Market
Fluctuations, John Wiley, London.
Sims, C.A. (1977), "Exogeneity and Causal Ordering in
Macroeconomic Models", in New Methods in Business Cycle
Research: Proceedings from a Conference, Federal Reserve
Bank of Minneapolis, pp. 23-43.
SOU 1985:52, Oversyn av valutareqleringen (A Review of the
Foreign Exchange Controls), Allmanna Forlaget, Stockholm.
Stulz, R.M. (1986), "capital Mobility in the World Economy:
Theory and Measurement. A Comment", Carnegie-Rochester
Conference Series on Public Policy, Vol. 24, pp. 105-114.
Wallace, N. (1983), "A Legal Restrictions Theory of the Demand
for 'Money' and the Role of Monetary Policy", Federal
Reserve Bank of Minneapolis Quarterly Review, winter 1983,
pp. 1-7.
- 88 -
- 89 -
3. The Foreign Exchange Risk Premium:
A Review of Theory and Evidence*
3.1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter is focused on a concept known as the foreign
exchange risk premium, which is a direct measure of the degree
of sUbstitutability between domestic and uncovered
foreign-currency securities. The maintained hypothesis is that
the degree of substitutability between domestic and covered
foreign-currency securities is very high, so that capital
mobility can be viewed as perfect. Under this assumption the
foreign exchange risk premium, p, may be defined in two
equivalent ways; it can either be expressed as the deviation
from uncovered interest parity (UIP),
r
= r* +
"'e + p,
S
(3.1)
or as the "bias" in the forward premium as a predictor of the
rate of change in the spot exchange rate,
fp
*
=
"'e + p,
S
(3.2)
This chapter was written together with Lars Horngren.
- 90 -
where r (r*) is the nominally safe interest rate on domestic
(foreign) securities; se is the expected rate of depreciation
of the domestic currency; and fp is the forward premium (in
percent) on foreign exchange. The definitions of p implied by
(3.1) and (3.2) are obviously equivalent under the condition of
covered interest parity (ClP) ,
r
r * + fp,
(3.3)
which is our operationalization of the concept of perfect
capital mobility.
It was argued in Chapter 2 that UIP has to be violated in order
for there to be some "monetary autonomy" in a small open
economy. According to (3.1) a non-zero risk premium is thus a
necessary condition for monetary autonomy. However, it should
be noted that although the term p in (3.1) and (3.2) is
referred to as a risk premium, there may be other reasons than
risk behind deviations from UIP (and from unbiasedness). If the
(true) risk premium is zero, obstacles to mobility or general
market inefficiencies are necessary for autonomy.
One might conjecture that current exchange rate policies, which
do not keep exchange rates permanently and credibly fixed,
imply that assets denominated in different currencies will not
in general be treated as perfect substitutes by investors who
are concerned with risk. The actual degree of monetary
autonomy, as defined in Chapter 2, would then be determined by
the sensitivity of the risk premium to changes in monetary
policy. The possibility for an independent interest rate policy
thus hinges on some knowledge of the determinants of the risk
premium and how they can be influenced by systematic pOlicy
actions.
Portfolio balance models such as that of Chapter 2 rely on
assumptions of imperfect asset sUbstitutability, and the
reliability of their predictions about the effects of monetary
- 91 -
policy depends on the validity of that assumption. since
imperfect asset sUbstitutability has been assumed a priori,
static portfolio balance models are not informative as to the
nature of the foreign exchange risk premium. The postulated
asset demand functions are not explicitly derived from
maximizing behavior of investors, and the static framework also
precludes a rigorous analysis of exchange rate dynamics and the
consequences thereof. In particular, interest rate (risk
premia) sensitivity to changes in monetary policy cannot be
related to individual attitudes towards risk or to the
properties of exchange rate processes.
The purpose of this chapter is to review the literature on
international asset pricing. The review consists of two parts,
discussing the theoretical (Section 3.2) and empirical (Section
3.3) literature, respectively. We discuss what implications the
reviewed studies have for the conclusions about the behavior of
the foreign exchange risk premium and, ultimately, for the
scope for monetary policy. The connection between the
theoretical models and the empirical studies, and the focus on
the foreign exchange risk premium are what distinguishes our
review from earlier (more comprehensive) reviews of
international asset pricing, such as Branson and Henderson
(1985).1
Broadly speaking, theoretical developments that go beyond the
static portfolio balance model involve two steps. First, asset
demand functions may be derived from intertemporal utility
maximization, based on rational expectations, under specific
assumptions about the nature of exogenous stochastic processes
characterizing asset returns and exchange rates. This approach
is taken, e.g., in Kouri's (1977) application of Merton's
(1971) model to the determination of interest rates and forward
1
Adler and Dumas (1983) survey the theoretical and
empirical literature on international asset pricing, but are
more concerned with the implications for corporate finance
than macroeconomic policy. Boothe and Longworth (1986) also
survey related empirical work.
- 92 -
premia. Second, asset prices and exchange rates may be derived
as functions of parameters of utility functions, production
technology, money supply, etc. Such a general equilibrium
framework is characteristic of Lucas' (1978, 1982) models, and
has been applied to an analysis of the forward premium by,
e.g., Hodrick and Srivastava (1984).2
Although the demand or supply for forward foreign currency is
not explicitly treated in the models to be reviewed, there is a
strong connection between this and the 'preceding chapter. In
Chapter 2 we made use of (derivatives of) demand functions for
uncovered foreign-currency securities and supply functions for
forward foreign currency. We also noted, however, that in the
case of perfect capital mobility (CIP), either function
reflects a demand for open (uncovered) positions. To understand
the nature of the foreign exchange risk premium it SUffices,
therefore, to look at the supply on the forward market or the
demand for uncovered foreign-currency securities, and the
models we have selected to review are focused on the latter. 3
3.2
THEORETICAL MODELS OF THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK PREMIUM
The literature on international asset pricing has been growing
rapidly in recent years. The purpose here is not to provide a
complete and general survey of this vast field. The focus is
limited by our interest in the determination of the foreign
exchange risk premium and the implications that asset pricing
2
Stulz (1984) combines elements of the traditions associated
with Merton and Lucas in a model of the foreign exchange
risk premium. Driskill and McCafferty (1982) analyze a
rational-expectations model where spot and forward exchange
rates are endogenously determined, but where asset demand
functions are not explicitly derived from optimizing
behavior.
3
In terms of the model of Chapter 2, we look into the
determinants of the i U (.) function, while the qP C.) function
is neglected. The converse strategy is followed by Eaton and
Turnovsky (1984) who assume that all "speculation" (i.e.,
open positions) takes place in the forward market.
- 93 -
models have for the question of international interest rate
dependence.
The review will proceed from the specific to the general,
starting with a model with just one consumption good. We will
then study how the risk premium is affected as the simple
framework is generalized.
3.2.1
A simple continuous time asset pricing model
To establish "first principles" regarding the determination of
the foreign exchange risk premium we will start by considering
a modified version of the model presented by Kouri (1977). We
have simplified his model by ignoring equity and not giving any
explicit role to money. In addition, the stochastic structure
is somewhat different.
It is assumed that the world is made up of n+1 countries. There
are bonds denominated in each of the local currencies, i.e.,
there are n+1 assets. These bonds are nominally safe in the
sense that they give a predetermined (instantaneous) return in
the currency in which they are denominated, i.e.,
dF.
~
~
~
r
i
dt,
i
1, ••• ,n+1,
(3.4)
where F i is the nominal (currency i) value of a bond
denominated in currency i.
Although the nominal return is safe, the real return of course
depends on the rate of inflation and the development of the
exchange rates. We therefore have to specify the dynamics of
the price levels in the n+1 countries and of the n exchange
rates. It is assumed that the rates of inflation in the first n
countries follow Ito processes, i.e.,
I\.
- 94 -
i
Vi dt + 0i dz i ,
1, •..
,n,
(3.5)
where vi is the (instantaneous) expected rate of inflation, 0i2
is the (instantaneous) variance of the rate of inflation and
dZ i is a so called Wiener process. 4 For simplicity, it is
assumed that the rate of inflation in the (n+1) country is
deterministic, i.e.,
dP n +1
V
Pn + 1
n +1 dt.
(3.6)
The n+1 countries produce the same single traded good, and the
law of one price is assumed to hold. This implies that exchange
rates adjust instantaneously to offset differences in the rates
of inflation between countries, i.e.,
P.
S.
1.
l.
Pn+ 1 '
i
1, .•.
,n,
(3.7)
where Si is the price of currency i in terms of the (n+1)st
currency, which will be used as reference currency throughout
this section. Note that the assumptions made imply that there
is one asset, the (n+1)st bond, with a safe real return.
I\.
Applying Ito's Lemma, it is straightforward to show that (3.7)
implies that the rate of depreciation of the ith currency is
given by
[.". i - .".n+1] dt +
0
i dz i ·
(3.8)
Having specified price and exchange rate dynamics, we can now
return to the problem of determining the real returns on bonds.
4
I\.
For details about Ito processes and other elements of
stochastic calculus, see, e.g., Merton (1971) and Malliaris
and Brock (1982).
- 95 -
Let F denote the real value (in terms of the single good) of a
security denominated in currency i, i.e.,
F.
(3.9)
].
A
We can differentiate (3.9), using Ito's Lemma, which gives
dF.
].
+
O~]dt
].
i
2
- o.] .dz.,
].
=
(3 .10)
1, .•• ,n.
o by assumption,
Since 0n+1
(3. 11)
In this setup, we introduce an investor who chooses paths of
consumption and asset holdings over an infinite horizon so as
to maximize expected utility. At each point in time, he is
subject to a wealth constraint
n+1
W
l
F.•
].
(3.12)
i=l
As asset returns are assumed to be his only source of income,
the stock of wealth changes (stochastically) over time
according to
n+1
dW
l
dF i - edt,
(3.13)
i=l
where C is the (instantaneous) rate of consumption. We can
rewrite (3.13) as
- 96 -
W[i~1
dW
where
Wi
dF.1
F.1
n
+ [1 -
I
i=l
wi]~Fn+11
- edt,
(3.14)
Fn + 1
Fi
W·
wi
SUbstituting from (3.10) and (3.11), we get
n
- C dt - W
l
wi 0i dzio
(3.15)
i=l
We can now state the investor's optimization problem formally:
m
max E t
I
U(CT , T)dT,
(3.16)
t
sUbject to the wealth constraint (3.15). Et is an expectation
operator conditional on current (period t) information. The
instantaneous utility function U(CT , T) is assumed to be
strictly concave.
This problem is solved by stochastic dynamic programming. 5
First, define the optimal value function:
(3.17)
Second, derive the optimal portfolio composition and rate of
5
The reader is referred to Merton (1969, 1971, 1973) for
more rigorous presentations of this technique.
-
97 -
consumption by solving the Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman equation:
+
1:2
J
WW
W2
~ ~
i=l j=l
Wi
w)o
Oi)O] =
(3.18)
0,
where o.J.)° is the covariance between inflation in countries i
and j.
The first order conditions are
(3.19)
n
lj=l w.
)
i
1 , ••• , n.
0,
0 ••
J.)
(3.20)
The interpretation of (3.19) is straightforward: equate the
marginal utility of consumption to the marginal value of one
more "unit" of wealth.
Conditions (3.20) are more interesting as they give the optimal
portfolio strategy. We can rewrite the n conditions in (3.20)
using matrix notation as
11'
2
n+l ] ] + Jww W
n
u
W
0,
(3.21)
where t is an (n x 1) vector of ones and () = [Oij] is the
(n x n) variance-covariance matrix of inflation rates. The
optimal portfolio strategy is thus
- 98 -
(3.22)
w
=-
When interpreting (3.22) we may first note that;
(Jw/JWWW)
6
is a measure of relative risk tolerance. Hence, the portfolio
shares in the n risky assets are (as expected) increasing
functions of ;. In addition, asset demands depend on the
expected real excess returns over the real return on the risk
free asset and on the variance-covariance structure of the
inflation rates. An increase in the expected return on any
given asset always increases the demand for that asset, but the
signs of the cross effects depend on the covariance structure
in a complicated way (cf. Branson and Henderson (1985».
Having derived the individual asset demand functions, we can
proceed to characterize the equilibrium asset returns by
deriving the aggregate asset demands and specifying the
outstanding stocks of assets.
Assume that there are h individual investors with homogeneous
expectations but (possibly) different initial endowments. By
summing across individuals, we can write the (n x 1) vector of
aggregate asset demand functions (as fractions of aggregate
(world) wealth) as
(3.23)
h
I
where
T
i=l
; i W.
~
h
I W.
i=l ~
6
In the present set-up, Jw/Jww = Uc/UccCw' so ; is
obviously related to the Arrow-Pratt measure of risk
aversion.
- 99 -
and the subscript i relates to the i:th individual. The scalar
T is thus a wealth weighted measure of (world) risk tolerance.
We can use (3.23) to determine market equilibrium as the rates
of return that have to obtain for a given stock of assets to be
willingly held:
r - Lrn + 1
-
[ T - LT n+1 ] +
0
2
(3.24)
Recalling from (3.8) that
is the expected rate of depreciation of the i:th currency, we
can rewrite (3.24) as
(3.25)
Hence, we can conclude that the nominal interest rate
differential is determined by the expected rate of depreciation
and a risk premium. The latter depends on the (world) degree of
risk aversion (T- 1 ), the variance-covariance structure (0), and
the composition of the outstanding (world) portfolio (x).
Note that (3.25) implies that UIP will be violated even in the
case of risk neutrality (T = 00), due to the presence of 0 2 on
the L.H.S. This is a special case of Jensen's inequality, and
can be circumvented in this simple model by a suitab~e
- 100 -
renormalization. 7 In a more general case, where, e.g., Pn + 1 is
stochastic and no asset with a safe real return exists, the
problem is more fundamental; see McCulloch (1975), Frenkel and
Razin (1980), Engel (1984), and Obstfeld (1986).
Equation (3.25) enables us to state more precisely the
conditions for UIP to hold. UIP obtains (approximately) if
investors are risk neutral (T- 1 = 0) or (exactly) if there is
no uncertainty concerning the rates of inflation (0=0, 0 2=0).
If neither of these conditions holds, assets denominated in
different currencies will be regarded as imperfect sUbstitutes,
and forward exchange rates will be systematically biased
predictors of future spot exchange rates.
In addition, this model implies that as long as investors are
risk averse, relative asset returns will be affected by changes
in asset supplies. There is thus a role for conventional
monetary pOlicy since an open market sale increasing the stock
of a given asset will change the required premium and, hence,
the interest rate differential. In this sense, the current
model provides some micro foundations for standard macro
portfolio balance models of the type analyzed in Chapter 2.
This result is exploited for purposes of policy analysis by
Kouri (1977), but his procedure is not without problems, as we
shall see in the next subsection. (The question is whether
monetary policy leaves n unaffected.)
7
=
Let Mi
l/S i = Pn + 1 /P i • The expected rate of change of
the exchange rate Hi is equal to
Hence,
which implies that UIP holds in the case of risk neutrality.
This dependence on arbitrary choices of units is known as
Siegel's paradox; cf. Siegel (1972).
- 101 -
Equilibrium rates of return in this model may also be expressed
in terms more obviously related to the traditional Capital
Asset Pricing Model (CAPM), although in an open economy
version.
Let ~x denote the expected real rate of return on the world
market portfolio, and o~ its variance, i.e.,
~x
x'[r-w-t[rn+1 -w n+l
=
]+0 2 ]
+ r n +1 - wn+l'
(3.26)
and, by definition,
0
2 = x/Ox.
(3.27)
X
SUbstituting from (3.24) and (3.26) gives
a2
x'Ox
X
(3.28)
The covariance between the return on asset i and the market
portfolio can also be inferred from the fundamental pricing
equation (3.24). Expanding the i:th row of (3.24), we have
n
a
xi
lj=l x j
-
o ..
~J
Defining the analog in this model to the standard CAPM "beta",
p.~
a
.
x~
-2-'
Ox
and sUbstituting from above, we have
(3.30)
- 102 -
This expression shows that the risk premium (or discount) on an
asset denominated in currency i is higher the higher the
covariance between its return and the return on the market
portfolio. As in this model all uncertainty derives from the
rates of inflation, this implies that a low correlation between
the inflation in country i and "world" inflation makes the i:th
bond a good hedge and, thus, the required risk premium is
correspondingly lower.
3~2.2
Extensions of the simple model
The model analyzed in the previous subsection is essentially a
modified version of Kouri (1977). In his model, the investor
can choose among nominally riskless assets, equity, and money.
A demand for money is secured by assuming that the investor's
money holdings is an argument in the utility function. The
effect of including equity in the model depends on whether the
stochastic processes of equity returns and inflation rates are
correlated. Risk premia will be affected not only by the
variance-covariance structure of inflation - as in the model of
the previous subsection - but also by the covariance between
inflation rates and equity returns. In this section, we will
discuss this and some of the other extensions that have.been
presented in the literature and how they affect the properties
of the risk premium.
Frankel (1982) considers the case where investors consume goods
from different countries. Each good is produced in a single
country and the law of one price holds, i.e., the currency i
price of a good from country j is equal to the nominal price
charged in country j mUltiplied by the currency-i/currency-j
exchange rate. Unlike Kouri (1977), Frankel assumes that the
goods of different origin are imperfect substitutes in
consumption. The optimal composition of consumption is,
however, not modelled, but the budget shares allocated to each
-=
103 ....
good, denoted by a j , are exogenous and constant. The result of
introducing several goods is to make the portfolio decision
depend on the consumption pattern. No single security can
provide a riskless real rate of return. Instead a riskless
portfolio is obtained by equating the portfolio shares to the
consumption shares, i.e., wj = a j . For an investor with some
degree of risk tolerance, it is not optimal to invest only in
this safe portfolio, but wj also depends on the stochastic
structure of exchange rates. The inclusion of many goods into
the model makes risk premia dependent on the consumption
pattern, but since the latter is non-stochastic, the mechanisms
that give rise to risk premia are the same as those discussed
in the previous section.
Kouri (1977) and Fama and Farber (1979) prefer to talk about
the risk premium as arising from "inflation risk" rather than
"exchange rate risk". This is not a very meaningful
distinction, however, as they model economies where the law of
one price (as well as purchasing power parity) holds. In this
type of model exchange rates and prices do not change
independently, and whether the risk involved should be labelled
exchange risk or inflation risk is purely a matter of
semantics.
Branson and Henderson (1985) allow both goods prices (or price
levels) and exchange rates to be stochastic and given by
A
exogenous, separate (but possibly correlated) Ito processes.
Consequently, there are two different types of uncertainty, and
the behavior of the nominal exchange rate does not completely
determine that of the real exchange rate. This implies that the
covariances between inflation and depreciation rates also
affect portfolio choice, and, hence, the risk premium. In
particular, a (foreign) asset that has a high exchange rate
risk, i.e., that is denominated in a currency with a high
variance, may nevertheless be valuable for a risk averse
investor if it has a low inflation risk in the sense that the
currency in question tends to appreciate when the inflation
- 104 -
rates go up. 8
The models of Frankel (1982) and Branson and Henderson (1985)
are cast in the static mean-variance optimization framework,
where the investor is assumed to maximize a function of the
mean and the variance of end-of-period real wealth. However,
mean-variance optimization, per se, is not crucial in this
context. Merton (1973) demonstrates that given that the
investment (and consumption) opportunities are constant across
time (state independent), mean-variance and multi-period
expected utility models give rise to the same type of asset
pricing relations, and to conventional CAPM formulations. If,
A
on the other hand, the assumption that asset prices follow Ito
processes is abandoned, mean-variance optimization is not, in
general, equivalent to multi-period utility maximization (cf.
Merton (1971».
To make the equivalence break down it is sufficient to
introduce a stochastic (instantaneously) risk free interest
rate in a mUlti-period model. This exposes the investor to a
type of risk that is absent in the models discussed so far,
which can be interpreted as term structure risk. For example,
an increase in the risk free (one-period) interest rate leads
to capital losses on fixed income securities, such as
multi-period bonds.
Assume, for example, that there is a nominally risk free short
term security with return r, and that there is a set of longer
term securities yielding r i (i = 1, .•• ,n). The latter returns
are nominally safe if calculated over a certain interval to
t.,
but the instantaneous returns are stochastic and dependent
1
on stochastic movements in r. The n+1 securities may be
associated with different countries, as in section 3.2.1, or
may (for now) be viewed as different securities in a single
8
Adler and Dumas (1983) discuss in greater detail the
aggregation problems that emerge when there are many goods
and the consequences for the asset pricing model.
- 105 -
(closed) economy. Let us, following stulz (1982), consider the
case of an extremely risk averse investor, who chooses his
portfolio so that the maturity structure coincides exactly with
some preferred (non-stochastic) consumption pattern. The
investor's real wealth at any instant, evaluated at current
goods and asset prices, will be stochastic and dependent on r.
However, this variance of real wealth is of no consequence to
his lifetime utility. This example serves to illustrate that
end-of-period real wealth is imperfectly correlated with future
consumption possibilities if the investment opportunity set is
stochastic. As pointed out by stulz (1982), the riskiness of an
asset should be measured by its contribution to the variance of
the optimal value J rather than to wealth.
The consequences of introducing a stochastic risk free rate are
analyzed by Merton (1973). He shows that the required excess
return on a given asset no longer can be expressed only in
terms of its relation to the market portfolio as in (3.31), but
must also be related to how it covaries with a portfolio that
hedges against changes in the risk free rate. The investor will
choose his optimal portfolio by obtaining a mix of three
"mutual funds", namely, (i) the risk free asset, (ii) the
market portfolio, and (iii) the portfolio that hedges against
interest rate variability. This result is referred to as
three-fund separation. In this case, there is only one state
dependent variable that represents shifts in the investment
opportunity set, but this result is easily generalized. For
each additional state variable that is introduced a new source
of risk is added, and an additional mutual fund, chosen so as
to have the highest possible negative correlation with the
state variable in question, will be included in the investor's
portfolio. This leads to a "multi-beta" asset pricing model,
where the excess return on any asset is related not only to its
covariation with the market portfolio, but also to how it
behaves relative to the N portfolios that hedge against changes
in the N state variables that affect the investment opportunity
set.
106
Breeden (1979) shows that Merton's multi=beta model can be
converted into an equivalent single-beta model
the fact that in optimum the marginal utility of wealth
the marginal utility of consumption (cf. (3019»& This makes it
possible to express the asset pricing relation in terms of
one parameter, namely, a "beta" that measures the covariance
between the return on the asset and the change in the rate of
consumption. Formally, assuming that there is just one good,
IJ. . . . .
].
r
Jl M .....
(3 ic [ (3MC
r],
where
COV(J.Li' d InC)
~iC = var(d InC)
is the expected rate of return on
i; r is the rate
of return on the riskless asset; C is the rate of consumption;
Jl
measures the expected return on any portfolio (iOe01 not
M
necessarily the market portfolio); and ~MC is defined
analogously to PiC.
Jl.
1
Breeden's model has a highly intuitive interpretationg From
(3.32) we see that a risky asset in this framework is one that
has a rate of return that is highly correlated with (the rate
of) consumption. Under standard assumptions, the marginal
utility of consumption is low in states where the level (or
rate) of consumption is high. The mirror image of high
consumption is that investment opportunities are unfavorable,
or as expressed by Breeden (1979): "Always, when the value of
an additional dollar payoff in a state is high, consumption is
low in that state, and when the value of an additional
investment is low, optimal consumption is high" (p. 278).
Therefore investors/consumers are willing to pay a premium
(require a lower rate of return) for an asset that has high
107
CD
payoffs in the low consumption (favorable investment) states.
It should be noted that Breeden's analysis is not an
alternative to Merton's in the sense that it offers some other
explanation as to the fundamental determinants of relative
asset returns. Consumption-CAPM does, however, have other
implications for empirical work than single-beta and multi-beta
CAPM'Slll
The basic intuition of the closed economy intertemporal asset
pricing models of Merton (1973) and Breeden (1979) carries over
to stulz' (1981) extension to international asset pricing.
stulz considers a two~country mUlti-commodity world, where both
investment and consumption opportunities differ between
countries. The differences in opportunity sets are reflected in
differences in the price indices which agents use to calculate
expected real returns in different states, i.e., purchasing
power parity is violated (e.go, due to the presence of
nontraded goods). Specifically, the means, variances, and
covariances of a set of assets depend on whether the investor
resides in the "home" country or in the "foreign" country. This
implies that there are non-trivial aggregation problems
involved in deriving the equilibrium asset pricing relations.
Different types of aggregation problems emerge for different
reasons. First, the existence of many goods raises the problem
of defining some price index that can be used to calculate
(expected) excess real returns and covariances between returns
and the real rate of consumption. Breeden (1979) treats this
problem thoroughly, and shows that two different price indices
will generally, when preferences are non-homothetic, be
required; one (based on marginal bUdget shares) for the
calculation of excess returns, and another (based on average
bUdget shares) for the calculation of the (real)
consumption~betas. Second, there is the problem of aggregating
asset demands of individuals who use different price indices
when calculating their optimal portfolios. Third, the concept
of risk aversion is not unambiguous in a mUlti-good model (cf.
- 108 -
LeRoy (1982».
Ignoring the aggregation problems, we may specify the following
general asset pricing equation (cf. Breeden (1979), pp. 287-288
and stulz (1981), p. 396):
(3.33)
where TW and C are measures of world risk tolerance and world
consumption expenditures, respectively; a.1,T and a.1, C are the
covariances of the return on asset i with the world rates of
inflation and consumption, respectively. (Asset returns,
inflation, and consumption have to be measured in a common
currency, e.g., the u.s. dollar.)
Given the asset pr1c1ng equation in (3.33) it is
straightforward to derive an expression for the foreign
exchange risk premium. Let r i be the return on a nominally
riskless bond denominated in domestic currency, and let r be
the return on a foreign bond denominated in, say, dollar. From
the analysis in section 3.2.1, we know that we can rewrite
(3.33) as
(3.34)
where a 2 (c) is the variance (mean) of the change in the spot
exchange rate (units of domestic currency per dollar). If a.1, C
> 0, the dollar return on the domestic bond is positively
correlated with consumption, which implies that the domestic
currency appreciates in high-consumption states. This makes
domestic bonds relatively risky, and their required return is
correspondingly higher in relation to dollar bonds.
Consider a seller of forward domestic currency. His expected
gain, in terms of dollar, equals the difference between the
- 109 -
expected future spot rate and the forward rate, F. (Given F, a
seller of domestic currency clearly profits from a
depreciation.) If the covariance between the spot rate and
consumption is high, so that the domestic currency depreciates
in high-consumption states (i.e., if a.1, C is low), the return
tends to be high when the additional income gives relatively
little in terms of added utility. This implies that a short
forward position is not a good hedge against consumption risk,
and that the forward rate will be low for any given expected
future level of the spot rate. In other words, the forward
premium (r 1 - r ~ InF - InS) is negatively related to the
covariance between Sand C, and positively related to ai,C'
which is consistent with (3.34).
Comparing (3.34) to the expression for the risk premium derived
in the simple model (cf. (3.25», we note the presence of a 1,T
.•
As discussed above in connection with Branson and Henderson
(1985), when goods prices and exchange rates both are
stochastic, the risk of a given asset depends also on its
covariance with goods prices. For example, an asset that has a
high return in high inflation states will be considered less
risky.
Stulz (1981) emphasizes that in his model "a change in the
supply of government bonds does not necessarily affect the risk
premium incorporated in the forward exchange rate" (p. 400).
While it is true that asset stocks are absent in (3.34), there
is nothing in the model that precludes open market operations
from influencing asset prices and risk premia. It seems
inevitable that the stock of government bonds is one of the
state variables in a model of this type. 9 However, the
connection between asset supplies and risk premia will be
considerably more complicated than in (3.25) where, at least
formally, one can conceive of an open market operation as a
9
This is indicated more clearly by Merton (1973) and
Breeden (1979).
~
110
~
(comparative static) change in the vector of asset shares, x. 10
In the Merton-Breeden-Stulz models the processes generating
asset returns are functions of the underlying state variables,
implying that both expected rates of return and their
variability are dependent on the state that is realized. This
is a general feature of rational-expectations general
equilibrium models. The Merton-Breeden-Stulz models do not,
however, deal explicitly with the supply side of the economy,
and thus cannot be viewed as complete general equilibrium
models. (Although their partial analyses, as stressed by
Breeden (1979), may be fully consistent with general
equilibrium.) Analysis of the effects of open market operations
requires a more detailed specification of, in particular, the
supply side of the model, and of the stochastic processes of
the underlying state variables.
One step in this direction is taken by Stulz (1984). He
develops a consumption CAPM model where the exchange rate is
endogenously determined. In order to handle this extension, he
assumes that there is only one good, which of course
reintroduces purchasing power parity. stulz shows that the
exchange rate depends positively on the domestic money stock
and interest rate and negatively on the corresponding foreign
variables. He therefore interprets his model as a monetary
approach model derived in an optimizing framework. contrary to
his earlier model, but in line with Kouri (1977), stulz (1984)
gives an explicit role to money by assuming that money is an
argument in the investor's utility function.
Just as in stulz (1981), the forward premium is a decreasing
function of the covariance between the exchange rate and
consumption. The endogeneity of the spot rate means that it is
possible to go one step further and express this covariance in
terms of the more fundamental variables, in particular, the
money supply processes. For example, an increase in the
covariance between the domestic money supply and consumption
10
Kouri (1977) performs some experiments of this type.
=
111
<=
lowers
,e and, hence, lowers the forward premium by making a
short forward
less risky for the reasons discussed in
the
above.
stulz' (1984) model is still not a complete general equilibrium
model; since the
market is not analyzed explicitly. The
determination of the foreign exchange risk premium in a full
setting is analyzed by Hodrick and
srivastava (1984, 1986)0 They use Lucas' (1982) dynamic
general equilibrium model of international
asset
where exogenous stochastic processes determine
the
for
and money supplies. Goods and asset prices
are thus endogenous functions of these "fundamental" stochastic
variables. Money is introduced in this model by imposing a
cash~in=advance constraint, i.e., by requiring that a
is used in all goods transactions. 11
The world consists of two countries with agents that have
identical
but are endowed with two different
in period t. Agents in the home country are
endowed with
units of good x and nothing of good y, whereas
in the
country agents receive Y units of good y. These
t
endowments follow known, stochastic Markov processes.
The nominal uncertainty in the model derives from changes in
the money
in the two countries. They are also assumed
to follow known exogenous Markov processes, where the growth
rates may also depend on the real state of the world, i.e., the
11
concerning the sequence of transactions in
are important for the properties of models of
In Lucas (1982), no uncertainty remains when the
markets open which means that the cash constraint
exactly binding. Svensson (1985) modifies the
by assuming that agents have to decide on their
holdings before the state of the world is revealed
which leads to a more general money demand function.
Olofsson (1985) uses Svensson's version of the model to
study the foreign exchange risk premium. As the results with
regard to the premium are highly similar, we will only
discuss the Lucas model as presented by Hodrick and
srivastava (1984)9
3
- 112 -
realization of the output process.
The representative agent in each country maximizes a standard
expected utility function
o <
~
< 1
(3.35)
where x it and Yit are the quantities consumed by agent i, and
is a constant discount factor.
~
It is assumed that the home good x can be bought only with home
currency and since no uncertainty remains when goods and asset
markets open, the nominal price of good x is simply
(3.36)
where Mt is the supply of domestic money. Similarly, if Nt is
the supply of foreign money, the nominal price of good y is
(3.37)
Under these assumptions, the spot exchange rate can be
determined by the arbitrage condition
(3.38)
where qt is the relative price of good y in terms of good x.
Equation (3.38) thus implies (as expected) that an increase in
the domestic money supply Mt raises St' i.e., leads to a
depreciation of the home currency.
- 113 -
Next, we must determine the forward exchange rate. Denoting the
home and foreign one-period interests rates by rx,t and ry,t'
respectively, covered interest parity implies
(3.39)
1 + r x, t
By definition, the gross return on an asset paying one unit of
home currency at t+l is the inverse of the price at time t of
that asset, or l/b x ,t. Hence, (3.39) becomes
b
S
t
_
v t
• ~
bx,t·
(3.40)
However, the asset prices are endogenously determined. In
general, the equilibrium price of any asset in this framework
is "such that the marginal utility foregone by purchasing the
asset is equal to the conditional expectation of the marginal
utility of the return from holding the asset" (Hodrick and
srivastava (1984, p. 8».
Let us consider a discount bond paying one unit of home
currency at t+l. The expected (discounted) marginal utility of
one unit of M is given by the amount of good x it is expected
to buy, evaluated by the agents at the marginal utility of good
x at t+l (since M cannot be used to buy good y), or, formally,
Et[P Ux ,t+l • P 1
].
x,t+l
In order to get this expected payoff, the agent has to pay bx,t
which in terms of current marginal utility foregone is worth
1
bx,t Ux,t • P
x,t
Equality between these two expressions implies that the asset
~
114
~
price must be
b
(3e41)
x,t
The price of a one-period security in home currency is thus
equal to the conditional expectation of the intertemporal
marginal rate of substitution of the home currency which
Hodrick and srivastava (1984) denote Et(Q~+l)' for brevity.
M
Qt+l can be interpreted as a measure in utility terms of the
change in the purchasing power of the home currency
Obviously, a similar expression holds for the
denominated asset and (3Q40) can be rewritten as
9
currency
st ·
While demonstrating that the forward premium is determined by
both real and monetary uncertainty interacting with the
preferences of the representative agents, (3e42) has no readily
intuitive interpretatione To get an explicit solution for the
risk premium one has to specify the structure of preferences as
well as of the exogenous stochastic processeSe
Domowitz and Hakkio (1985) provide an example where the forward
premium depends on the expected rate of depreciation of the
spot exchange rate plus a term which is proportional to the
variances of the money stocks but independent of consumer
preferences. They choose to label the second term a risk
premium, a definition that is questionable given that this term
is due solely to Jensen's inequality and has nothing to do with
the investor's degree of risk aversiono Analogous expressions
thus appear also in the partial models discussed above even
under assumptions of risk neutrality (see, e.ge, equation
(3.25»0
=
To our
I
the only
the paper
=
Domowitz and Hakkio (1985) is
Lucas D (1982) model (while
in a study of the foreign
to
the
risk
115
The
equilibrium model offers
into the nature of the risk premium, but the
theoretical framework is in some respects too general and in
others too
to offer any guidance for empirical
let alone
analysis.
One way to look at our review is to
it as an
of the micro foundations of the traditional
balance modelse A simple example shows that the
model and intertemporal
need not be inconsistent.
Consider an open market operation by the domestic central bank
which involves
sale of domestic securities. The portfolio
balance model
that the domestic interest rate goes up,
which ~ at
rate expectations and foreign
interest rates ~
that the foreign exchange risk premium
also rises. since
investors must reduce their holdings
of (increase their debt in) foreign~currency denominated
assets,
become more exposed in case the domestic currency
should depreciatee To
this situation, they require a
(higher) premium on domestic relative to foreign assets.
However, an important result in intertemporal asset pricing
models is that risk premia are complicated functions of the
covariance structure of the fundamental stochastic processes.
The riskiness of a position in domestic or foreign currency
depends on the variances and covariances of, e.g., inflation
and exchange rates, or = more generally ~ of asset prices and
consumptionG The effects of an open market operation thus
depend on whether it changes private agents' perceptions about
the stochastic structure of the economy. The simple and highly
- 116 -
intuitive direct effect from open market operations on the risk
premium may be weakened or strengthened by any indirect effects
on expectations. The central bank's asset holdings may be
considered state variables which change stochastically over
time, and affect the dynamic processes of asset prices and
exchange rates in general equilibrium. Rational agents can
therefore be expected to revise their expectations in response
to pOlicy actions. This qualification to the results derived in
static and/or partial portfolio balance models strongly
parallels the well-known critique of the use of reduced-form
Phillips curves for policy analysis.
The asset pricing models furthermore suggest that certain
restrictions on the parameters of asset demand functions should
(or should not) be imposed. In particular, the demand for
nominally safe domestic and foreign-currency securities should
depend on the expected difference between the returns on these
two types of assets and not on the levels of returns. On the
other hand, the assumption of gross SUbstitutability, which is
often imposed in portfolio balance models, has no strong
theoretical justification. When asset demands are explicitly
derived from purposeful behavior one is also forced to be
explicit about if, why, and how national currencies are valued.
For a more detailed discussion of these issues, see Branson and
Henderson (1985).
In the introduction to this chapter we stated that a non-zero
risk premium is necessary for monetary autonomy. Theoretical
analyses suggest that risk premia will be non-zero if there is
some variance in exchange rates, and if investors are not risk
neutral. If risk neutrality can be ruled out on a priori
grounds, exchange rate variability thus becomes a sufficient
condition for monetary autonomy. At the same time, monetary
autonomy has been defined as the possibility to affect the
domestic interest rate given a specific level of the exchange
rate. In other words, even if monetary authorities would prefer
to keep exchange rates basically fixed, and consider this to be
- 117 -
an important ingredient in (or a constraint on) an independent
monetary policy, they have to create some uncertainty about the
future level of the exchange rate in order for monetary
policies to be effective.
Not only does the optimal exchange rate policy depend on the
degree of international asset SUbstitutability, as argued by,
e.g., Henderson (1984), but asset substitutability is also a
function of the design of exchange rate policy. One question
that immediately arises is whether the benefits of autonomy
exceed the costs of the induced uncertainty. Although normative
issues are not discussed in this chapter, the distinction
between what possibly can be done (by creating uncertainty) and
what should be done (i.e., what the optimal degree of
uncertainty is) is important.
Although the theoretical models reviewed obviously leave some
important questions unanswered, they offer some guidelines for
empirical research. In the models based on the conventional
CAPM formUlation, there is a direct connection between asset
stocks and the size of the risk premium, and this connection
should be possible to verify (or reject) in empirical studies.
In more general formulations of asset pricing models, such as
the consumption-CAPM, the size of the risk premium is more
directly related to real consumption than to asset stocks.
3.3
EMPIRICAL WORK
The theoretical analyses of, e.g., Merton (1971, 1973), Lucas
(1978), and Breeden (1979) have inspired many researchers to
stUdy the actual co-movements of asset returns and consumption.
For example, Grossman and Shiller (1981) argue that the
variability of u.s. stock prices is not consistent with risk
neutrality, given the variability of u.s. consumption. Also
referring to u.s. data, Grossman, Melina, and Shiller (1985)
report that stock yields have higher average real return and
higher covariance with consumption than other financial assets.
-- 118
At an informal level, therefore, data on asset
seem to
be consistent with optimizing
behavior
by risk averse investors, and with theoretical asset
models However, when Hansen and Singleton (1983)
to
estimate the (constant) relative risk aversion of a
representative (American) investor,
arrive at
but very imprecise point estimates. The
restrictions derived from specific assumptions about properties
of preferences and stochastic processes are
ected similar
results are reported by Grossman, Meline, and Shiller (
12
0
Given these results obtained in closed economy
is
perhaps not surprising that the overwhelming
studies on foreign exchange risk premia have followed a
non-structural, or atheoretical, approach. That is, there are
numerous studies investigating the existence of risk
while there are relatively few attempts to
these premia
in terms of empirical regularities in fundamental variables. We
will review the results from some atheoretical tests in section
3.3.1, while some tests based on structural asset
models are summarized in section 3.3.2. A
of the empirical literature is offered by Boothe and
(1986) •
3.3.1
Atheoretical tests
The most common way to test for the existence of a risk premium
is to examine whether forward exchange rates are unbiased
predictors of future spot exchange rates. Under the maintained
hypothesis of CIP, this unbiasedness test is
a
test for UIP (cf. (3.1)~(3.3». The null hypothesis of no risk
premium corresponds to the hypothesis that [al' ~
= [0, 1] in
12 Hansen and Singleton (1982) propose an instrumental
variables technique which is shown to yield smaller standard
errors than the maximum likelihood procedure
by
Hansen and Singleton (1983). Mankiw, Rotemberg, and Summers
(1985) apply this technique in a study of u.s data, but the
overidentifying restrictions implied by
utility maximization are rejected.
- 119 -
the regression model
(3.43)
where sand f are the logarithms of the spot and forward rates,
respectively. Under the joint hypothesis of no risk premium and
rational expectations, 6 t +1 is the innovation in (i.e., the
unforecastable part of) the exchange rate, and [a 1 , ~1] can be
estimated by OLS. 13 In most cases, studies based on (3.43) have
rejected unbiasednessi see, e.g., Cumby and Obstfeld (1984) and
Fama (1984) for test results and further references.
It is interesting to go beyond this finding and inquire into
the properties of the implied risk premium. Fama (1984) notes
that the deviation of ~1 from unity is "a direct measure of the
variation in the premium in the forward rate" (p. 321). Using
(3.2) we can write the forward premium, f t - St' as the sum of
two components, namely, the expected rate of depreciation and
the risk premium:
(3.44)
This implies that, under rational expectations, the regression
coefficient ~1 can be expressed as
(3.45)
13 The use of logarithms is usually motivated as a way to
circumvent the problems created by Jensen's inequality. The
specification in terms of differences is used to avoid
statistical problems caused by possibly non-stationary data.
See Hansen and Hodrick (1980), Engel (1984), Meese and
Singleton (1982), and Cumby and Obstfeld (1984) for
discussions of these issues.
- 120 -
If there is zero covariance between the risk premium and the
expected rate of depreciation, ~1 measures the proportion of
the variance that can be attributed to 0 2 [E(St+1 - St)]. Hence,
1 - ~1 is the fraction that is due to the variance in the risk
premium.
However, it cannot be ruled out that the risk premium and the
expected rate of depreciation are correlated and in Fama's
study there is actually evidence of such a correlation. Using
spot and forward dollar exchange rates for nine currencies,
Fama consistently gets negative values for Pl. From (3.45) this
is seen to imply that
(3.46)
and
(3.47)
Moreover, P1 < 0 implies that
1 .., (jl
(3.48)
and, the denominator being positive, we see that
(3.49)
Hence, it must hold that
(3.50)
i.e., the variance in the risk premium exceeds the variance in
the expected rate of depreciation. Fama's (1984) results thus
- 121 -
indicate that time varying risk premia exist and he can also
say something about their properties. Risk premia seem to have
higher variance than, and to be negatively correlated with,
changes in exchange rates. 14
Let us briefly discuss some econometric problems involved when
interpreting regression equations like (3.43). Suppose that the
null hypothesis [atl Pi] = [0, 1J cannot be rejected, or that
at least Pi is not significantly different from unity. As
stressed by Gregory and McCurdy (1984, 1986), one should
nevertheless not be led to conclude that there is no evidence
of a time-varying risk premium, unless the regression equation
shows no signs of parameter instability, autocorrelated
residuals, etc. 15 Only when the regression does not lead to a
rejection of the null and passes the diagnostic tests the
result is fully consistent with unbiasedness. Such findings
have been reported by Gregory and McCurdy (1984, 1986) in the
cases of the U.S.jCanadian dollar rate (1976-1980), and the
u.s. dollar in relation to the Italian lira (1978-1981), the
Japanese yen (1978-1981), and the German mark (1974-1977).
Suppose, on the other hand, that the null hypothesis of
unbiasedness is rejected (as in, e.g., Fama's (1984) paper).
Diagnostic tests are still called for, insofar as one wishes to
give the regression coefficient(s) a specific interpretation.
As pointed out by Hodrick and srivastava (1986), the
coefficients estimated by Fama (1984) may be biased under the
alternative hypothesis of a time-varying risk premium, due to
residual autocorrelation. They conjecture, however, that the
14 Hodrick and srivastava (1986) show that these empirical
findings are consistent with intertemporal general
equilibrium theory.
15 Note that the unbiasedness hypothesis does not imply that
residuals should be homoskedastic (even if non-overlapping
data are used); but if they are not, standard errors will
not be consistently estimated by OLS. For applications of
techniques which yield consistent estimators even in the
presence of heteroskedasticity, see Cumby and Obstfeld
(1984) and Hodrick and srivastava (1984).
- 122 -
bias is small-, since any autocorrelation in the risk premium is
likely to be dominated by the variance of exchange rate
innovations. Hodrick and srivastava present and make use of
techniques which allow for autocorrelated residuals, and their
results confirm Fama's earlier findings.
The regression model (3.43) is a natural formulation of a test
for unbiasedness and it gives some interesting insights into
the behavior of ri.sk premia. However, in order to obtain
absolute measures of the implied premia, other techniques must
be
Wolff (1987) presents one such approach, which he
describes as complementary to the regular regression model. He
uses a signal-extraction technique known as the Kalman filter
to identify the time-series properties of the spot exchange
rate, which enables him to derive a direct estimate of the
expectations and risk premium components of the forward
premium. Wolff finds that the premium in the dollar/pound
exchange rate can be modelled as an AR(l) process, whereas the
dollar/mark and dollar/yen premia follow MA(l) processes. Just
like Fama (1984), he concludes that the variations in the
premia are significant. They account for more than half of the
variance in the deviations between forward and realized spot
rates. The estimated premia also show considerable variability
over time. Moreover, the risk premium on a given currency can
vary between positive and negative over time.
Wolff's (1987) study must be labelled atheoretical as there is
no attempt to explain the particular time-series patterns that
emerge However, it gives support to the conclusion from Fama/s
(1984) regression tests that time-varying risk premia are an
important element in the forecast errors that are made when
forward rates are used to predict future spot rates.
&
Korajczyk (1985) can be said to take the finding that there are
deviations from unbiasedness as his starting point. He points
out that intertemporal general equilibrium asset pricing models
imply that "the risk premia in forward prices should be
- 123 -
identical to the risk premia differential in the real returns
on default-free nominal bonds denominated in the respective
currencies" (p. 347). Korajczyk thus tests the hypothesis that
the deviations from unbiasedness can be accounted for by
estimated differences in expected real returns. It is well
known that UIP and PPP (purchasing power parity) jointly imply
real interest rate parity (see, e.g., Cumby and Obstfeld
(1984». References to formal asset pricing models are not
necessary to motivate this relation. Under the maintained
hypotheses of ClP and relative ex ante PPP, Korajczyk (1985)
attributes risk premia to deviations from real interest rate
parity.
Using a 3SLS procedure where the first step is used to estimate
the unobservable expected real interest rate differential from
a set of instrumental variables, Korajczyk cannot reject the
null hypothesis that risk premia are the cause of deviations
from unbiasedness. This result means that the data are
consistent with ClP, PPP, and the implicit model of real
interest rate differentials, but the tests do not really give
any evidence on the common determinants of the co-movements in
risk premia and interest rate differentials. In this sense,
Korajczyk's study must also be classified as atheoreticale His
results are consistent with the hypothesis that risk premia
exist, but in order to study their determinants structural
asset pricing models must be specified and tested. 16
3.3.2
Tests of structural asset pricing models
Probably the most direct test of an asset pricing model is made
by Frankel (1982). He develops an expression for the risk
premium using an international portfolio balance model derived
from mean-variance optimization. The representative investor is
assumed to maximize a function of the mean and the variance of
16 An important contribution in Korajczyk's (1985) work is the
calculation of sample distributions for test statistics
which do not rely on normality assumptions.
- 124 -
his end-of-period real wealth (evaluated in u.s. dollars). with
the dollar as the reference currency, the investor chooses a
vector x t of portfolio shares allocated to n other assets
denominated in different currencies. The only uncertainty in
the model relates to exchange rate changes. However, the
investor is assumed to pay for goods from a given country with
the currency of that country, which means that the real value
of his portfolio depends also on the composition of his
consumption basket, summarized by the vector a of consumption
shares allocated to goods produced in the n foreign countries.
The consumption pattern is exogenous and assumed to be constant
over time.
Under the circumstances given in Frankel's model, end-of-period
wealth is a "sufficient statistic" for future consumption
possibilities {cf. stulz (1982». Except for the presence of
several goods, which are consumed in fixed proportions, the
static mean-variance model is basically equivalent to the
simple intertemporal model discussed in section 3.2.1. Solving
the optimization problem gives the following asset demand
equations:
(3
.51)
Here x t is a (nxl) vector of portfolio shares; St is a (nxl)
vector of (logs of) dollar exchange rates (DM/$, etc.); r t is a
(nxl) vector of nominal non-dollar interest rates, while the
dollar interest rate is denoted
r~; n is the
variance-covariance matrix of exchange rate changes; l is a
vector of n ones; and p is the coefficient of relative risk
aversion. p is assumed to be constant, which implies that the
underlying utility function is assumed to be isoelastic. a, the
(nxl) vector of consumption shares, also represents the
minimum-variance.portfolio that an extremely risk averse
investor would hold. The second term in (3.51) can be referred
to as the "speculative portfolio". Assuming asset supplies to
- 125 -
be exogenously fixed, (3.51) can be interpreted as an
equilibrium condition which we can invert to get an expression
for the deviation from UIP:
r t - tr$t - E[St+l - St] = PO[Xt -
a].
(3.52)
To adapt the model to econometric estimation Frankel invokes
rational expectations, i.e.,
(3.53)
where tt+1 is the error in the exchange rate forecast. Under
rational expectations, it is independent of all information
available at time t. Combining (3.52) and (3.53) gives the
regression model
(3.54)
Frankel emphasizes that "0 is precisely the variance-covariance
matrix of the error term, and the system should be estimated
subject to this constraint" (p. 260). Applying maximum
likelihood techniques, he estimates the crucial parameter p
simultaneously with o.
This test requires data on interest rates and exchange rates
for the L.H.S. variables and observations on x t and a.
Recalling that these are the vector of asset shares in the
world market portfolio and the vector of consumption shares,
respectively, it is obvious that Frankel encounters
considerable measurement problems.
When (3.54) is estimated using a maximum likelihood procedure,
it turns out that the likelihood function is extremely flat,
but that its maximum is at p=O. The hypothesis of risk
neutrality can therefore not be rejected. However, the evidence
is not very strong and the test gives no basis for asserting
- 126 -
the null hypothesis p=O as Frankel, e.g., cannot reject p=l or
p=2 either. The power of the test is therefore quite low, a
feature which Frankel's analysis shares with the closed-economy
applications referred to above.
It should be noted that Frankel (1982) assumes eIP to hold and
uses forward premia instead of interest rate differentials when
computing the dependent variable. The regression equation is
thus respecified as
(3.55)
where f t is a vector of forward dollar exchange rates.
This approach is also followed by Park (1984), who presents a
two-country version of Frankel's test. In a world of only two
currencies, (3.55) is reduced to
(3.56)
where (f, s, x, a) are now scalars,
0
2
is the variance of the
2
e~change rate, and 0 2
0 • Park (1984) allows for variable
consumption shares, and specifies his model as
~
(3.57)
and tests the null hypothesis c 2 = 0 against c 2 < o. There are
several differences between this test and Frankel's. First,
Park imposes less structure on his model by not acknowledging
the theoretical constraint that c 2 = - po 2 • Second, Park allows
[Co' c 1 ] to differ from [0, 1]. An interesting question then
is: what conclusion should be drawn if it turns out that one
can reject neither that c 2 = 0 (Which is consistent with UIP)
nor that c ¢ 1 (Which is an indication of biasedness in the
1
forward exchange rate)?
- 127 -
Given an estimate of Co not significantly different from zero,
the conclusions from different estimates of [C 1 ' c 2 ] are
summarized in the table below.
C1
=
1
Not rejected
02
=
0
Not rejected
· consistent with
UIP
C1
=
1
Rejected
• Not consistent
with UIP
• Wrong model of the
risk premium
C2
< 0
• Not consistent
with UIP
• Not consistent
with UIP
• Correct model of
the risk premium
• Insufficient model
of the risk premium
Not rejected
The only result that is consistent with UIP is if it cannot be
rejected that [C 1 ' C 2 ] = [1, 0]. While Frankel (1982) is unable
to reject that c 2 = 0, he cannot say anything about the value
of c 1 • Therefore it cannot be ruled out that his failure to
reject UIP is due to use of an incorrect model of the risk
premium.
Park (1984) reaches a conclusion different from that of
Frankel. Using u.s. dollar/D-mark rates, Park obtains estimates
of c 2 that are negative, which is consistent with positive risk
aversion. In quarterly exchange rates, the adjusted market
portfolio (xt-a t ) explains 10-20 percent of the total variance.
The proportion is somewhat smaller for monthly data. Park
concludes that "[t]he tests provide firm evidence for a risk
premium in the foreign exchange market" (p. 175). Park makes no
joint test of [C 1 , 02]' however. In fact, in quarterly data c 1
is significantly less than unity. It can therefore be
questioned whether Park offers a sufficient explanation of the
- 128 -
risk premium.
It is illuminating to relate Park's model to the time-series
test used by, e.g., Fama (1984). Park estimates a model where
the dependent variable might be non-stationary and his
hypothesis tests should therefore be interpreted with caution.
A more appropriate formulation than (3.57) is therefore
which is equivalent to (3.57) under the null hypothesis of UIP,
[Co' c l ' C2 ] = [0, 1, 0].
Comparing (3.58) to Fama's regression model, repeated here for
convenience,
(3.43)
we see immediately that the essence of Park's test is therefore
to try to decompose Fama's residual term into a systematic risk
premium and a random component. Analogously, Frankel (1982), by
assuming C 1=1, tries to find a systematic component in the
deviations between the realized spot rate and the forward rate.
Frankel and Park rely on a mean-variance asset pricing model
where the risk premium is shown to depend on variables that
are, at least in principle, observable. Domowitz and Hakkio
(1985) base their theoretical and empirical analysis on Hodrick
and srivastava's (1984) extension of Lucas' (1982)
intertemporal general equilibrium model. As discussed in
section 3.2.2, they construct an example where the bias in the
forward rate as a predictor of the future spot rate is
proportional to the difference between the variances in the
money supply processes in the two countries. 17 However, instead
17 The question whether this can be appropriately defined as a
risk premium in their particular example was discussed in
Section 3.2.2.
- 129 -
of relating the risk premium to the conditional variances in a
set of exogenous variables, they assume that it depends
directly on the forecast errors in previous periods. In our
notation, the regression estimated by Domowitz and Hakkio can
be written as
(3.59)
where h t2 + 1 , the time-varying component of the risk premium, is
a function of lagged forecast errors, c~. In essence, this is
thus the test for unbiasedness (3.43) augmented by a proxy for
the risk premium.
The empirical results from estimating (3.59) using maximum
likelihood techniques are mixed. Domowitz and Hakkio study five
dollar exchange rates and in no case can the hypothesis 9 = 0
be rejected. In a joint test of Po = 9 = 0 and PI = 1, the null
hypothesis is rejected for two out of five currencies. There is
thus some evidence of a bias, but the specific assumption that
the risk premium (or the bias) is systematically related to
lagged forecast errors does not gain much support.
Hodrick and srivastava (1984) derive testable cross-equation
constraints from a conventional capital asset pricing model.
Their starting point is the following relation,
i=l •••• ,n.
(3.60)
Fi)/Si is the excess of the relative return of an
t
t
uncovered position in currency i over that of a covered
position, Yt is the expected difference between the return of a
benchmark asset and a nominal risk-free return, and P~ is the
standard CAPM-P, i.e., the covariance between (S~+l - F~)/S~
- 130 -
and the return on the benchmark asset, divided by the variance
of the latter. It is assumed that the pi,s are constant.
As demonstrated in Section 3.2.1, such a CAPM relation can be
derived in a simple intertemporal model where asset returns,
A
exchange rates, etc. follow state-independent stochastic Ito
processes. It also follows from a static mean-variance approach
(cf. Branson and Henderson (1985». Hodrick and Srivastava
(1984) choose to interpret (3.60) as "perfectly consistent"
with Lucas (1982) general equilibrium model. This is a somewhat
misleading interpretation, since the simple CAPM relations
break down when one goes to more general, equilibrium
treatments (where, e.g., asset returns and exchange rate
processes are state-dependent). The difference between the
study by Hodrick and Srivastava (1984) and those based on
structural equations derived from mean-variance optimization
therefore lies more in the empirical work than in the
theoretical underpinnings.
Instead of defining a benchmark asset (or portfolio) and
compute its rate of return relative to the riskfree rate in
order to obtain a direct measure of Yt' which would be
analogous to Frankel's (1982) approach, Hodrick and srivastava
treat Yt as an unobservable variable. Being unknown to the
econometrician, Yt must be replaced by the best linear
predictor based on a subset of available information, using
instrumental variables. Specifically, Hodrick and srivastava
assume that
+ 7f t '
(3.61)
i.e., the forward premia on all the currencies in the sample
are used as instruments. Using (3.61), the following system of
n regression equations is obtained:
- 131 -
RJ_
·
~
j
v t +1
I3j~
t
+ RJ·
'0
~
't+l
i
_
i[F~81- S~]
'I
t
j
+ v t +1 '
j=l, •• ,n, (3.62)
j
+ +t+l'
E[Sf+l,- Ff]
j
~
~
SJ
t
(3.63 a)
j
j
St+1 - F t
sj
(3.63 b)
t
The cross-equation constraints in (3.62) enable them to recover
separate estimates of the 13's and -r's.
Hodrick and srivastava (1984)
pi,s, and for two out of five
the Japanese Yen vs. the u.s.
hypothesis that the composite
get significant estimates of the
currencies (the Swiss Franc and
dollar) they can reject the
parameters 0..
= ~j~li are all
1)
zero, which would seem to give some support to their particular
CAPM model of a time-varying risk premium. However, the
cross-equations constraints imposed by the model are rejected
at the five percent level. Hodrick and srivastava (1984)
conclude: "If the source of the rejection of the unbiasedness
hypothesis is a time-varying risk premium, it appears that the
assumptions of the [Hansen and Hodrick (1983)] model are too
strong. Either the piS ••• are not constant, or some other
model of risk and return is necessary to describe the risk
premium" (pe 15). Recall that the intertemporal asset pricing
models do not offer any grounds for assuming that the piS are
constant. As noted by Hodrick and Srivastava, this hypothesis
is strictly empirical, and it turns out to be rejected.
Note the formal similarity between (3.62) and the test equation
used by Fama (1984). The dependent variables in (3.43) and
(3.62) are different, but this is purely a matter of
convenience. Under unbiasedness (13 1 = 1 in (3.43» we would
A
expect 9 ii
o.
Examining the results from Hodrick and
- 132 -
srivastava's (1984) estimates of the unconstrained model, we
A
find that the 9 ii 's are negative in four out of five cases and
significantly so in three. The pattern is thus the same as in
Fama (1984) although less uniform.
Mark (1985) also takes the intertemporal asset pr1c1ng model as
his point of departure. The theoretical framework is a
parameterized one-good version of the Lucas (1982) model. Using
a utility function eXhibiting constant relative risk aversion,
denoted by ~, he shows that optimal investor behavior implies
Vj,
(3.64)
where c t +1 is the rate of consumption, T t + 1 the rate of
inflation (in the domestic country), and It denotes the
information set at time t. Applying the generalized
instrumental variables technique suggested by Hansen and
Singleton (1982), Mark uses condition (3.64) to estimate
degree of risk aversion of the representative investor.
~,
the
Using u.s. consumption data and four dollar exchange rates,
Mark (1985) obtains very imprecise estimates of the degree of
risk aversion. Despite different theoretical motivations and
empirical procedures, his results are thus similar to Frankel's
(1982). Mark can also test the validity of his model with the
help of overidentifying restrictions. Here the results are
mixed, partly depending on the choice of instrumental
variables, but in two out of the twelve reported
specifications, the model can be rejected at the 5 percent
level. The evidence against the underlying asset pricing model
is thus not as strong as in Hodrick and srivastava (1984).
However, given the general imprecision in the coefficient
estimates, Mark's results cannot be said to offer much support
for the particular constant relative risk aversion model that
is tested. One possibility is of course that this
parameterization is too restrictive, but more general
- 133 -
specifications of utility functions might prove difficult to
use in empirical work. These problems are not unique to
international asset pricing, of course, and, in fact, Mark's
results are quite similar to those obtained in similar tests of
closed economy asset pricing models; see, e.g., Grossman,
Melino, and Shiller (1985).
3.4
CONCLUDING COMMENTS
static portfolio balance models usually rely on an assumption
about imperfect sUbstitutability between, e.g., assets
denominated in different currencies. The degree of
sUbstitutability is crucial for the question of monetary
autonomy, and imperfect sUbstitutability should be reflected in
foreign exchange risk premia. This has been our motivation for
reviewing the theoretical and empirical literature on risk
premia.
While there is a direct relation between asset stocks and risk
premia, or interest rate differentials, in traditional
portfolio balance models, intertemporal asset pricing models
suggest that risk premia are complicated functions of the
stochastic structure of the economy. Theory leads us to expect
that relative asset prices may be more directly related to
consumption than to asset stocks.
While there is a good understanding of the general nature of
risk premia, based on theoretical developments, the empirical
results are inconclusive. When attempts have been made to
relate differences in asset returns to economic variables on
which risk premia according to asset pricing theory should
depend, the results have been rather negative. The
inconclusiveness is characteristic of closed-economy
applications as well as applications to international asset
prices, and of tests using data on asset stocks as well as
tests on consumption data.
- 134 -
On the other hand, there are several studies that show that UIP
is violated, or that the forward exchange rate is not an
unbiased predictor of the future spot rate. As pointed out by
Huang (1984), it is relatively easy to reject unbiasedness
against a very general alternative hypothesis, e.g., ~l ¢ 1 in
(3.43), but when a more specific alternative is introduced, the
tests seem to fail to reject unbiasedness. In other words,
although much empirical evidence is consistent with the
hypothesis that a risk premium exists, the results can also be
attributable to, e.g., imperfect market integration or simple
market inefficiency.
It can be argued that risk premia are unimportant and that
other explanations to the observed bias should be tested. On
the other hand, it is clear that the risk premium models tested
are very crude and that empirical work in this field is plagued
by difficult measurement problems. The inherent unobservability
of many important variables means that the researcher has to
resort to heroic assumptions, or basically ad hoc choices of
instrumental variables.
Attempts to derive direct estimates of risk premia and exchange
rate expectations through time series analysis have given mixed
results. The strategy for future research should probably be to
formulate and test time series models which are explicitly
based on information about exchange rate policies and other
institutional arrangements. A step in this direction, although
admittedly a short step, is taken in the next chapter, where we
focus our analysis on the Swedish currency basket system.
- 135 -
REFERENCES
Adler, M. and B. Dumas (1983), "International Portfolio Choice
and Corporation Finance: A Synthesis", Journal of Finance,
Vol. 38, pp. 925-984.
Boothe, P. and D. Longworth (1986), "Foreign Exchange Market
Efficiency Tests: Implications of Recent Empirical
Findings", Journal of International Money and Finance,
Vol. 5, pp. 135-152.
Branson, W.H. and D.W. Henderson (1985), "The Specification
and Influence of Asset Markets", in Jones and Kenen, eds.,
Handbook in International Economics, Vol. II,
North-Holland, Amsterdam pp. 749-805.
Breeden, D.T. (1979), "An Intertemporal Asset Pricing Model
with Stochastic Consumption and Investment Opportunities",
Journal of Financial Economics, Vol. 7, pp. 265-296.
Cumby, R.E. and M. Obstfeld (1984), "International
Interest-Rate and Price-Level Linkages under Flexible
Exchange Rates: A Review of Recent Evidence", in Bilson
and Marston, eds., Exchange Rate Theory and Practice,
University of Chicago Press/NBER, Chicago, pp. 121-151.
Domowitz, I. and C.S. Hakkio (1985), "Conditional Variance and
the Risk Premium in the Foreign Exchange Market", Journal
of International Economics, Vol. 19, pp. 47-66.
Driskill, R. and S. McCafferty (1982), "spot and Forward Rates
in a stochastic Model of the Foreign Exchange Market",
Journal of International Economics, Vol. 12, pp. 313-331.
Eaton, J. and S.J. Turnovsky (1984), "The Forward Exchange
Market, Speculation and Exchange Market Intervention",
Quarterly Journal of Economics, Vol. 99, pp. 45-69.
Engel, C.M. (1984), "Testing for the Absence of Expected Real
Profits from Forward Market Speculation", Journal of
International Economics, Vol. 17, pp. 299-308.
Fama, E.F. (1984), "Forward and spot Exchange Rates", Journal
of Monetary Economics, Vol. 14, pp. 319-338.
Fama, E.F. and A. Farber (1979), "Money, Bonds, and Foreign
Exchange", American Economic Review, Vol. 69, pp. 639-649.
Frankel, J.A. (1982), "In Search of the Exchange Risk Premium:
A Six-Currency Test Assuming Mean-Variance Optimization",
Journal of International Money and Finance, Vol. 1, pp.
255-274.
- 136 -
Frenkel, J.A. and A. Razin (1980), "Stochastic Prices and Tests
of Efficiency of Foreign Exchange Markets", Economics
Letters, Vol. 6, pp. 165-170.
Gregory, A.W. and T.H. McCurdy (1984), "Testing the
Unbiasedness Hypothesis in the Forward Foreign Exchange
Market: A Specification Analysis", Journal of
International Money and Finance, Vol. 3, pp. 357-368.
Gregory, A.W. and T.H. McCurdy (1986), "The Unbiasedness
Hypothesis in the Forward Foreign Exchange Market. A
Specification Analysis with Application to France, Italy,
Japan, the united Kingdom and West Germany", European
Economic Review, Vol. 30, pp. 365-381.
Grossman, S.J., A. Melino, and R.J. Shiller (1985), "Estimating
the continuous Time Consumption Based Asset Pricing
Model", NBER Working Paper No. 1643.
Grossman, S.J. and R.J. Shiller (1981), "On the Determinants of
stock Market Variability", American Economic Review Papers
and Proceedings, Vol. 70, pp. 222-227.
Hansen, L.P. and R.J. Hodrick (1980), "Forward Exchange Rates
as Optimal Predictors of Future spot Rates: An Econometric
Analysis", Journal of Political Economy, Vol. 88, pp.
829-853.
Hansen, L.P. and R.J. Hodrick (1983), "Risk Averse Speculation
in the Forward Foreign Exchange Market: An Econometric
Analysis of Linear Models", in Frenkel, ed., Exchange
Rates and International Macroeconomics, University of
Chicago Press/NBER, Chicago, pp. 113-142.
Hansen, L.P. and K.J. Singleton (1982), "Generalized
Instrumental Variables Estimation of Nonlinear Rational
Expectations Models", Econometrica, Vol. 50, pp.
1269-1286.
Hansen, L.P. and K.J. Singleton (1983), "Stochastic
Consumption, Risk Aversion, and the Temporal Be~avior of
Asset Returns", Journal of Political Economy, vol. 91, pp.
249-265.
Henderson, D.W. (1984), "Exchange Market Intervention
Operations: Their Role in Financial Policy and Their
Effects", in Bilson and Marston, eds., Exchange Rate
Theory and Practice, University of Chicago Press/NBER,
Chicago, pp. 359-406.
Hodrick, R.J. and S. Srivastava (1984), "An Investigation of
Risk and Return in Forward Foreign Exchange", Journal of
International Money and Finance, Vol. 3, pp. 5-29.
- 137 -
Hodrick, R.J. and S. Srivastava (1986), "The Covariation of
Risk Premiums and Expected Future spot Exchange Rates",
Journal of International Money and Finance, Vol. 5,
Supplement, pp. 5-21.
Huang, R.D. (1984), "Some Alternative Tests of Forward Exchange
Rates as Predictors of Future spot Rates", Journal of
International Money and Finance, Vol. 3, pp. 153-167.
Korajczyk, R.A. (1985), "The Pricing of Forward Contracts for
Foreign Exchange", Journal of Political Economy, Vol. 93,
pp. 346-368.
Kouri, P.J. (1976), "The Determinants of the Forward Premium",
Institute for International Economic Studies, Seminar
Paper No. 62, University of Stockholm.
Kouri, P.J. (1977), "International Investment and Interest Rate
Linkages Under Flexible Exchange Rates", in Aliber, ed.,
The Political Economy of Monetary Reform, The MacMillan
Press Ltd, London, pp. 74-96.
LeRoy, S.F. (1982), "Expectations Models of Asset Prices:
A Survey of Theory", Journal of Finance, Vol. 37, pp.
185-217.
Lucas, R.E., Jr. (1978), "Asset Prices in an Exchange Economy",
Econometrica, Vol. 46, pp. 1429-1445.
Lucas, R.E., Jr. (1982), "Interest Rates and Currency Prices in
a Two-Country World", Journal of Monetary Economics, Vol.
10, pp. 335-359.
Malliaris, A.G. and W.A. Brock (1982), Stochastic Methods in
Economics and Finance, North-Holland, Amsterdam.
Mankiw, N.G., J.J. Rotemberg, and L.H. Summers (1985),
"Intertemporal Substitution in Macroeconomics", Quarterly
Journal of Economics, Vol. 100, pp. 2215-251.
Mark, N.C. (1985), "On Time Varying Risk Premia in the Foreign
Exchange Market: An Econometric Analysis", Journal of
Monetary Economics, Vol. 16, pp. 3-18.
McCulloch, J.H. (1975), "Operational Aspects of the Siegel
Paradox", Quarterly Journal of Economics, Vol. 89, pp.
170-175.
Meese, R.A. and K.J. Singleton (1982), "On Unit Roots and the
Empirical Modeling of Exchange Rates", Journal of Finance,
Vol. 37, pp. 1029-1035.
Merton, ReC. (1969) "Lifetime Portfolio Selection under
Uncertainty: The Continuous-Time Case", Review of
Economics and Statistics, Vol. 51, pp. 247-257.
- 138 -
Merton, R.C. (1971), "Optimum Consumption and Portfolio Rules
in a Continuous-Time Model", Journal of Economic Theory,
Vol. 3, pp. 373-413.
Merton, R.C. (1973), "An Intertemporal Capital Asset Pricing
Model", Econometrica, Vol. 41, pp. 867-887.
Obstfeld, M. (1986), "Capital Mobility in the World Economy:
Theory and Measurement", Carnegie-Rochester Conference
Series on Public Policy, Vol. 24, pp. 55-104.
Olofsson, T. (1985), "On Some Parity Conditions in
International Economics: A General Equilibrium
Cash-in-Advance Approach", mimeo, University of Uppsala.
Park, K. (1984), "Tests of the Hypothesis of the Existence of
Risk Premium in the Foreign Exchange Market", Journal of
International Money and Finance, Vol. 3, pp. 169-178.
Siegel, J.J. (1972), "Risk, Interest Rates, and the Forward
Exchange", Quarterly Journal of Economics, Vol. 86, pp.
303-309.
Stulz, R.M. (1981), "A Model of International Asset Pricing",
Journal of Financial Economics, Vol. 9, pp. 383-406.
Stulz, R.M. (1982), "The Forward Exchange Rate and
Macroeconomics", Journal of International Economics, Vol.
12, pp. 285-299.
Stulz, R.M. (1984), "Currency Preferences, Purchasing Power
Risks, and the Determination of Exchange Rates in an
optimizing Model", Journal of Money. Credit and Banking,
Vol. 16, pp. 302-316.
Svensson, L.E.O. (1985), "Currency Prices, Terms of Trade, and
Interest Rates: A General Equilibrium Asset-Pricing
Cash-in-Advance Approach", Journal of International
Economics, Vol. 18, pp. 17-41.
Wolff, C.C.P. (1987), "Forward Foreign Exchange Rates, Expected
spot Rates, and Premia: A Signal-Extraction Approach",
Journal of Finance, Vol. 42, pp. 395-407.
- 139 -
4. The Foreign Exchange Risk Premium
in a Currency Basket System *
4.1
INTRODUCTION
It is a standard result that under a fixed exchange rate system
the possibilities for a small open economy to pursue an
independent monetary policy depend on the degree of capital
mobility and on the extent to which a domestic policy
intervention is offset by capital inflows or outflows. If
investors consider domestic and foreign assets to be perfect
sUbstitutes (on an uncovered basis), this offset will be
complete.
In a world where exchange rates are not rigidly and permanently
fixed, assets denominated in different currencies may not be
perfect sUbstitutes in investors' portfolios. The possibility
of exchange rate changes may introduce a risk premium (or
*
This chapter was written together with Lars Horngren. We are
grateful to Marianne Nessen and Ingrid Werner for research
assistance and to Staffan Viotti, Tom Cooley, Peter Englund,
Nils Gottfries, Leo Leiderman, and Johan Myhrman for
comments on earlier drafts.
- 140 -
discount) that drives a wedge between the foreign and domestic
interest rates. To the extent that this premium depends on
variables that are subject to policy control, the interest rate
differential can be influenced by the central bank and there
will be room for an independent monetary policy.
After the breakdown of the fixed exchange rates regime under
the Bretton Woods system a variety of exchange rate
arrangements have emerged. While some of the major currencies
are floating more or less freely relative to one another, a
number of countries have tried to establish more stable
currency arrangements. These attempts have been especially
common in Western Europe, where, for example, the European
Monetary System (EMS) is intended to maintain stable exchange
rates within the European Community. Some of the non-member
countries have chosen unilateral systems in which they tie
their exchange rates to indices of foreign currencies, so
called currency basket systems. If the currencies had been
perfectly pegged to a basket index, a currency basket system
would be equivalent to a system of rigidly fixed exchange
rates. However, as implemented in practice there is usually
some flexibility in the value of the currency index, which
makes it meaningful to study risk premia in this context. 1
The most common way to investigate the existence of risk premia
is to test whether forward exchange rates are unbiased
predictors of future spot exchange rates. This may be done by
regressing realized spot exchange rates (or changes in rates)
on forward rates (forward premia) and checking whether the
coefficient estimates and the general statistical properties of
1
Even if a currency is completely fixed in terms of a basket
of other currencies, the (once-and-for-all) choice of
weights in the basket involves a richer menu of policy
options than if the currency were to be fixed in terms of a
single foreign currency. Since international exchange rate
agreements generally do not require rates to be completely
fixed, the freedom to choose weights may be the most
important difference between "currency basket" and
traditional "fixed" regimes.
- 141 -
the regression are consistent with unbiasedness (see, e.g.,
Cumby and Obstfeld (1984), Fama (1984), and Gregory and McCurdy
(1984, 1986». Alternatively, one may test whether current
information, other than the forward rate, helps predict future
changes in the spot exchange rate by regressing the difference
between the realized spot rate and the forward rate on relevant
variables in the information set (see, e.g., Hodrick and
srivastava (1984, 1986». If the current forward premium is the
only explanatory variable used in the latter test, it gives
exactly the same result as the former (cf. Fama (1984) and
section 4.4 below). Such (non-structural) tests for the
existence of risk premia are usually conducted on bilateral
exchange rates in isolation, and the null hypothesis of no
premium (no bias) is generally rejected. It has proved
difficult, however, to relate the deviations from unbiasedness
to economic variables on which risk premia should depend,
according to standard (structural) models of asset pricing
theory. Frankel (1982) and Mark (1985) derive testable
relationships between spot and forward exchange rates from
models of one representative investor, but they are not (using
different sets of u.s. dollar exchange rates) able to find any
empirical support for the cross-equation constraints derived
from theory or of risk aversion of the representative investor.
Some authors have noted that the efficiency of (non-structural)
bilateral ordinary least squares (OLS) regressions may be
improved by the use of the seemingly unrelated regressions
(SUR) technique (see, e.g., Fama (1984) and Bailey, Baillie and
McMahon (1984». It is conceivable that the innovations in,
e.g., the U.s. dollar/German mark exchange rate are correlated
with those in the dollar/French franc rate, which means that
there is a potential gain in efficiency from using SUR on the
system of dollar exchange rate regressions rather than OLS on
each equation independently. This conjecture is supported by
the findings by Edwards (1982) and Diebold and Nerlove (1986).2
2
It should be noted that the cross-equation constraints in
the structural models of Frankel (1982) and Mark (1985) are
- 142 -
As pointed out by Fama (1984), the case for an integrated
multi-currency framework is further strengthened by the fact
that many currencies, such as the German mark and the French
franc, are deliberately managed within formal international
agreements.
To our knowledge, the intricacies of actual exchange rate
policies have so far not been considered in unbiasedness tests
of basket currencies such as the Finnish mark and the Swedish
krona (see Haaparanta and Kahkonen (1985) and Oxelheim (1985),
respectively).3 The purposes of this chapter are to examine the
theoretical foundations of risk premia determination in a
currency basket system, and, in particular, to test for the
existence of a risk premium on a currency that is tied to a
basket, namely, the Swedish krona.
The chapter is organized as follows. In section 4.2 we
characterize a currency basket policy and in section 4.3 we
discuss the determination of the foreign exchange risk premium
in terms of a portfolio optimization model used by Frankel
(1982). In sections 4.4 and 4.5 we use the methods applied by
Fama (1984) and Engel (1984) to investigate whether there is a
risk premium on the Swedish krona. Our results indicate that
derived from the maximizing behavior of a risk averse
investor, while Edwards' (1982) model builds on the
assumption of risk neutrality. The argument for SUR in the
latter study is based on the observation that the
innovations (which are due, e.g., to monetary policy shocks)
in the dollar/mark, dollar/franc and mark/franc exchange
rates are related by the triangular arbitrage condition.
Note also that Diebold and Nerlove (1986) are not concerned
with the issue of unbiasedness but of excessive exchange
rate variability.
3
Margarita (1987) examines risk premia on "EMS" vs. "rest of
the world" assets, but does not discuss how these aggregates
have been (or should be) defined. Hooper and Morton (1982)
study the behavior of a trade-weighted index of U.S. dollar
exchange rates, although there is reason to believe such an
aggregate to be of less interest than official currency
baskets. Abraham (1985) compares the behavior of a certain
EMS rate, the Belgian franc/German mark rate, with that of
the u.S. dollar/Belgian franc rate.
- 143 -
what could be considered a necessary condition for a small open
economy to have some monetary independence is met in the case
of Sweden. Some conclusions and caveats are discussed in
section 4.6.
4.2
CHARACTERISTICS OF A CURRENCY BASKET POLICY
The Swedish krona is tied to a currency basket, an index of
fifteen foreign currencies. The index weights correspond to the
relative shares in total Swedish trade, i.e., exports and
imports. The exception is the U.S. dollar that has been given a
weight which is twice the share of the U.S. in Sweden's total
exports and imports. The other countries included are those
whose trade shares exceed one percent and have convertible
currencies. In principle, the value of the krona is fixed to
this basket, at the same time floating bilaterally against all
the individual currencies in the basket. In practice, this
system is complicated by the facts that the central bank allows
the krona to deviate from a benchmark value of the currency
index, and that there is a non-zero probability of discrete
changes in the benchmark value (i.e., of devaluations or
revaluations).
When the currency basket was instituted in August 1977, the
benchmark value of the index was set at 100. To date, there
have been two changes in the benchmark value - devaluations of
10 % in September 1981 and 16 % in October 1982. After the
latest devaluation the Riksbank set the benchmark at 132. The
central bank at first declined to specify any exact bounds on
the deviations from the benchmark value that it would permit.
Deviations up to two percent have been observed, but in July
1985 the Riksbank officially announced bounds of ± 2 units
(±1.5 percent). This is analogous to the fluctuations of ± 1
percent against the dollar that were permitted in the Bretton
Woods system. 4
4
For further discussions of the currency basket policy, see
Franzen, Markowski and Rosenberg (1980), Franzen and
- 144 -
In order to illustrate how a currency basket system works, we
will first invest in some notation. If we let sf denote the log
of the currency j/dollar exchange rate in period t, we can
define the log of the index of the Swedish currency basket (It)
as follows:
Here, sf
= [Si,
••• , S~] contains all dollar exchange rates (in
logarithms), except the krona/dollar rate, in period t; the
(mx1) vector So contains the same exchange rates in the base
period; s~r is the krona/dollar exchange rate in period t
(consequently, s~r - sf is the krona/currency j exchange rate
=
1
in period t); t is a (mx1) vector of ones; and Wi
[w , ... ,
m
w ] contains the currency basket weights of all currencies
except the dollar. The weight of the dollar is thus equal to
(1 - wit).
From the definition of the index we can derive an expression
for the depreciation of the krona against the dollar:
(4.2)
Hence, an observed depreciation of the krona against the dollar
can be due to an overall depreciation of the krona (an increase
in the index of the currency basket) and/or to an overall
appreciation of the dollar against an average of the non-krona
currencies.
Our description of the currency basket given by (4.1) - (4.2)
does not give a completely accurate description of the Swedish
Rosenberg (1983), and Edison and VArdal (1987). Horngren and
viotti (1985) give a background to the July 1985
announcement of the bounds.
- 145 -
currency basket. First, the official index is not defined as a
geometric average as in (4.1), but as an arithmetic average.
This fact will be overlooked throughout our analysis. Second,
the weights are not constant, but are changed on April 1 each
year to reflect (long term) changes in the trade pattern. Since
the annual changes in weights are small and can be fairly well
predicted, they add no uncertainty of theoretical interest,
although they have to be taken into account in empirical work. 5
If it is assumed that
0,
j
1, •••
,m,
(4.3)
where cov(x,y) denotes the covariance between x and y, the
variance in the krona/dollar exchange rate can be decomposed
into two components:
var[Skr
t+1 - sktr]
= ~/~W + aI'
2
(4.4)
where ~ is an mxm variance-covariance matrix with diagonal
elements equal to var[sf+l - Sf] and off-diagonal elements
equa I t
5
0
i
j
COV [ St+l
i] ·
j
h
- St'
St+l - St ' and were
or2 -= var [I t+l-
To take account of the changes in weights we should write
It
= [s~r
-
S~~t]
- Wf[St - So,t]'
(i)
where it is indicated that the base rates are changed every
time the weights change. This is to guarantee that the
changes in weights do not affect the index as long as spot
rates are constant, i.e., that
(iii)
Using (ii) - (iii) we can rewrite (4.2) as
kr - St
kr = w + [ St+l - St] + I + - It·
St+l
t 1
1
t
.... 146 .....
It]' In the theoretical analysis in section 4.3 we will impose
(4.3). Our motivation for doing this is that this condition
comes close to a definition of a currency basket policy. A
strong negative or positive correlation between the index and
the dollar value of other currencies would make a distinction
between a currency basket policy and an ordinary flexible
exchange rate policy rather meaningless. If the central bank is
successful in its aim to keep the krona stable in terms of the
basket, and if the deviations from the benchmark value are
primarily due to domestic (monetary policy) disturbances, then
(403) should hold, at least approximately.
The sample (unconditional) variances and covariances displayed
in Tables 1-2 do not lead one to reject (4.3) as a reasonable
description (ex ante) of the currency basket regime.
Correlations and covariances between the changes in the
currency basket index and in its non-dollar currencies (in
relation to the u.s. dollar) are close to zero, and generally
much lower than within the group of non-dollar currencies.
Correlation coefficients are somewhat higher for the period
after the devaluation in October 1982, which simply reflects
the fact that the variance of the index has been much lower in
this period.
From Table 1 we can also see that there is a block of highly
correlated currencies (i.e., in terms of changes relative to
the u.s. dollar) consisting of the EMS currencies (DEM, DKK,
FRF, NLG, BEe, ITL), the Spanish peseta (Which is tied to an
unofficial basket), the Austrian schilling (which has been
pegged to the German mark), the Swiss Franc (Which is, in
principle, floating), and the "basket currencies" of Finland
and Norway. outside this block are the flexible currencies of
the united Kingdom, Japan, and Canada. Not surprisingly, the
latter currency is the one with the lowest variance.
Table I.
Sample correlations and covariances for the Swedish currency basket
and dollar exchange rates, January 1980 - May 1981
Entries below the diagonal are correlations.
1. Index
2.
3.
4.
5.
DEN
GBP
NOK
DKK
6. FIM
7.
8.
9.
10.
FRF
NLG
BEe
ITL
II. CHF
12.
13
14.
15.
JPY
ATS
ESP
CAD
1
2
3
4
5
3.48
-0.59
12.79
0.21
7.30
11.36
0.69
0.62
0.67
0.23
9.35
0.61
0.64
0.55
0.84
0.87
0.83
0.80
0.61
0.81
0 . 50
0.60
0.68
0.64
0.86
0.81
0.27
-0.43
12.3
7.34
9.19
12.21
0.86
0.95
0.98
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.67
-0.09
0.03
0.04
-0.07
0.31
-0.12
-0.11
-0.09
-0.05
-0.10
0.10
-0.09
0.01
-0.01
0.60
0.87
0.98
0.85
0.94
0.99
0.95
0.93
0.92
0.63
0.997
0.83
0.35
0.59
0.41
7.01
9.06
0.87
0.88
0.98
0.84
0.40
6
1.72
8.90
6.62
7.74
8.80
8.59
0.82
0.85
0.82
0.81
0.82
0.67
0.84
0.79
0.29
9
10
11
-0.81 -0.69
-0.64
12.3
7.23 1.53
8.84 9.08
11.6 11.9
8.48 8.65
12.33 11.5
0.94 12.11
0.91 0.95
0.92 0.92
0.88 0.92
0.63 0.63
0.94 0.99
0.83 0.85
0 . 34 0 . 36
12.5
7.39
-0.32
11.0
6.07
-0.75
12.8
8.02
9.49
12.2
9.31
11.9
12.5
12.3
10.9
7..
11.8
8
9.23
12.5
8.95
11.8
12.2
13.66
0.91
0 . 86
0.61
0.95
0.82
0.35
7.99
10.8
7.86
10.6
10.6
11 . 1
10.89
0.85
0.63
0.93
0.80
0.36
15.09
0.68
0.92
0.76
0.36
12
0.67
8.24
6.15
7.03
8.55
1.24
8.08
8.07
S.2S
7.66
9.63
13.46
0.62
0.56
0.30
13
14
15
-0.61
12.5
7.10
9.07
0.07
8.80
6.81
7.23
8.73
6.93
8.7
8 . 76
-0.04
1.70
1.87
1.11
1.90
1.17
1.65
1.71
1.78
1.64
12.0
8.68
11.6
12.1
12.4
9 . 04
10.8
7.81
8.84
12.5
7.95 6 . 14
12.35 8.58
0.82 8.86
0.35 0.39
"Index" is the percentage rate of change of the Swedish currency basket's index. DEN is the percentage
of German marklU.S. dollar exchange rate, and the other dollar exchange rates are those of the British
the Norwegian krona (NOK), the Danish krona. (DKK), the Finnish mark (FIM) , the French franc (FRF), the
(NLG), the Belgian Franc (BEe), the Italian lira (ITL), the Swiss franc (CHF), the Japanese yen (JPY),
schilling (ATS), the Spanish peseta (ESP), and the Canadian dollar (CAD).
1.88
1.48
1.69
1.60
1.86
rate of change
pound (GBP),
Dutch guilder
the Austrian
~
~
Table 2.
Sample correlations and covariances between the Swedish currency basket
and dollar exchange rates, October 1982 - May 1987
-- --
-
-
_.
--
- -
- ---
----
_.
-
--
--
----
-
Correlation
with Index
1,00
-0.21 -0.08
-0.23
-0.20
-0.17 -0.26
-0.18
-0.19
-0.25 _-0.20
-0.18
-0.20
-0.14 -0.04
Covariance
with Index
0.17
-0.31 -0.12
-0.30
-0.28
-0.19 -0.36
-0.26
-0.28
-0.35
-0.31
-0.26
-0.29
-0.19 -0.02
~
00
- 149 -
In Table 3 we see that approximately one third of the variance
in the changes in the krona/dollar rate since January 1980 has
been accounted for by the variance in the change of the
currency basket index. The corresponding figure for the period
since the latest devaluation is 3 %. Insofar as the ex post
unconditional variances tell something about the riskiness of
different currencies ex ante, we can conclude that the risk
associated with changes in the value of the krona relative to
any single foreign currency is largely due to international
movements in exchange rates. In particular, the variance in the
krona/U.S. dollar exchange rate that is due to changes in the
currency basket index within the official bounds is, jUdging
from post-devaluation data, negligible. Table 3 also indicates
that (4.4) can be treated as a valid condition for practical
purposes.
since large movements of the basket index within the bounds or
discrete changes in the benchmark value cannot be ruled out ex
ante, the variability in the currency index may, nevertheless,
introduce a risk premium on the krona and, hence, possibly give
some scope for an independent interest rate policy. We will
elaborate on this point below and formalize our argument by
analyzing a model of international asset pricing in which one
country pursues a currency basket policy.
- 150 -
Table 3.
a.
January 1980 - May 1987
2.
3.
b.
Decomposition of the sample variance in the
krona/dollar spot exchange rate
variance in currency basket
3.48
variances and covariances in other
dollar exchange rates
5.80
covariances between currency basket
and other dollar exchange rates
-0.16
4.
Residual due to changes in weights
0.25
5.
variance in the krona/dollar
exchange rate
9.37
October 1982 - May 1987
1.
variance in currency basket
0.17
2.
variances and covariances in other
dollar exchange rates
5.90
3.
covariances between currency basket
and other dollar exchange rates
~O.41
4.
Residual due to changes in weights
0.06
5.
variance in the krona/dollar
exchange rate
5.72
Note: The figures on rows 2 and 3 are equal to W/~W and
2 COV[w'(St+1 - St)' I t + 1 - It]' respectively.
They have been calculated using the currency basket
weights for April 1985 - March 1986.
- 151 -
4.3
RISK PREMIA IN A CURRENCY BASKET SYSTEM
The starting point for our theoretical analysis is Frankel's
(1982) international portfolio balance model. Consider a
representative investor who maximizes a utility function of the
mean and variance of his end-of-period real wealth (evaluated
in u.s. dollars which is the reference currency). The
investor's problem is thus to allocate his real wealth Wt among
assets denominated in m+2 different currencies i.n order to
maximize F[E(Wt + 1 ), var(wt + 1 »). There is one nominally safe
asset in each currency, and the investor chooses a vector x t of
portfolio shares. The only uncertainty in the model is related
to exchange rate changes; in particular, nominal interest rates
are non-stochastic. In order to illustrate that it is the real
return that is important, it is assumed that the investor
consumes goods from different countries. Each good is priced i.n
the producing country's currency, and nominal prices are
non-stochastic. Through changes in exchange rates, the real
value of the portfolio will depend on the composition of his
consumption basket, summarized by the vector a of consumption
shares. For simplicity, the consumption pattern is exogenous
and assumed to be constant over time.
Assuming asset supplies to be exogenously fixed, interest rate
differences must in equilibrium satisfy:
r
t
.- 'r$
~ t - E [ St+l-St)
=
p~
[ x t - a + (Xktr_akr) "'1.]
~
2
+ P ( x tkr -a kr) 0I'
,
(4.5)
(4.6)
=-
where p is the coefficient of relative risk aversion (p
F2Wt 2/F1 ): r j is the safe one-period nominal interest rate on
currency-j assets; and we have assumed (4.3) - (4.4) to hold.
- 152 -
In order to save space the derivation of (4.5) - (4.6) is left
out; an explicit derivation is given by Frankel (1982) and a
similar model is analyzed in detail in Chapter 3 of this
thesis. Condition (4.5) is the equilibrium relation derived by
Frankel (1982) except that in his model w is a null-vector as
there is no country pursuing a currency basket policy.
Equation
~5)
gives the relation between the dollar interest
rate and all the other non-krona interest rates. The right-hand
side is (by definition) a risk premium, and we see that
uncovered interest parity (UIP) obtains either if the
representative investor is risk neutral (p = 0) or if there is
no randomness in exchange rate changes (~ = 0). Otherwise,
there will be risk
and the signs and magnitudes of these
depend, in addition to p and I, on (x t - a), the difference
between the outstanding supply of assets in a given currency
and the consumption share of goods priced in that currency.
This dependence is due to the fact that the greater the
difference between portfolio and consumption shares, the
greater is the uncertainty about the real value of the
currency, other things equal Whether there will be a premium
or a discount depends not only on (xt - a), however, but also
on the covariance structure in ~G
0
One implication of this mean-variance optimization model is
that, as long as investors are risk averse, changes in relative
asset supplies (x t ), eog~, via open market operations, affect
the risk
premia~
There would thus be a direct channel through
which monetary policy could influence the relative returns on
domestic and foreign assets.
6
6
A model based on intertemporal utility maximization, as
opposed to myopic mean-variance optimization, would, under
the special circumstances considered by Frankel (1982), give
the same optimality and equilibrium relations between
interest rates, exchange rates, and asset stocks. Under more
general circumstances, when, e.g., stochastic properties of
interest and exchange rates depend on some fundamental state
variables, an investor has to consider other information
than that given by the variance-covariance matrix of
- 153 -
In order to get an expression for the risk premium on assets in
kronor in relation to dollar assets, substitute (4.5) into
(4.6) to get
(4.7)
We see that this risk premium is determined by two factors: the
risk premia between all other currencies and the dollar, and
the uncertainty introduced by the central bank's currency
basket policy. Thus, even if the krona were rigidly fixed to an
index of all other currencies (O~ = 0), there would still be a
risk premium between the krona and the dollar. This proposition
is a general result which does not depend on the features of
the specific asset pricing model used here.
Another exercise will be illuminating. Rewrite (4.7) to obtain
the risk premium on the krona relative to the currency basket
weighted portfolio:
If the currency index is fixed (E(I t +1 - It) = a~ = 0), there
is no risk on a basket weighted position over and above that of
a Swedish asset (remember that the consumption pattern and
commodity prices are non-stochastic in this model). Hence,
there will be no excess return on Swedish assets in comparison
to a currency basket portfolio and complete interest rate
dependence. The only difference then between a basket system
and a regular fixed exchange rate is that the domestic interest
rate has to equal a weighted average of interest rates rather
exchange rates. For discussions of these issues, see, e.g.,
Merton (1973) and Stulz (1982).
- 154 -
than a specific foreign rate.
It is thus the variability in the currency index that
(possibly) gives the central bank some independence. The choice
to let the ~urrency index vary can therefore be interpreted as
an attempt to maintain some latitude for an independent
monetary policy. From this line of reasoning it also follows
that a test for a risk premium that is specific to the Swedish
krona should not be performed on bilateral parity relations
(such as (4.7» but on krona interest rates relative to a
basket-weighted portfolio of foreign assets (i.e., on (4.8».
When formulating our empirical tests on krona exchange rates,
we will not make further use of Frankel's (1982) structural
portfolio balance model. Instead, we will apply the
non-structural (or "atheoretical") approaches previously used
by, e.g., Cumby and Obstfeld (1984), Fama (1984), and Engel
(1984). Like Frankel (1982), these studies exploit the
equivalence of UIP and unbiasedness which obtains under the
assumption of covered interest parity (CIP).7 The unbiasedness
tests have the advantage of requiring data on forward exchange
rates instead of interest rates. We are primarily interested in
the risk premium on the currency basket, but, for comparison,
results from bilateral tests on three important krona exchange
rates will also be reported.
7
The validity of this assumption is investigated by McPhee
(1984) and Englund, McPhee, and viotti (1985), who find that
the deviations from ClP are within reasonable limits given
the existence of transaction costs.
- 155 -
4.4
THE DATA AND THE FORMULATION OF TESTS
Table 4 shows some descriptive statistics for three krona
exchange rates and for the official currency basket. (f~ and s~
are here the logarithms of krona/currency i forward and spot
exchange rates, and f~ - s~ is the forward premium on the
currency basket, i.e., a weighted average of the individual
forward premia.) The data are monthly observations from January
1980 to May 1987, i.e., a total of 89 observations. The
exchange rate quotations are end-of-day buying rates, spot and
thirty-day forward, on the last trading day of the month,
obtained from SEB International and Gotabanken. 8
These figures can be compared to those reported by Fama (1984,
Table 5) on nine dollar exchange rates (not including the
Swedish krona). He notes that the standard deviations of f~ i
St+1
are 1 arger than th ose
0
f
i
e he1S d a t a. The18
St+1
- Sti 1n
indicates that "the current spot rate is a better predictor of
the future spot rate than the forward rate" (p. 323). As can be
seen from Table 4, this pattern is present also in the Swedish
data. This is also consistent with the findings of Meese and
Rogoff (1983), who show that the current spot rate outperforms
a number of standard models of exchange rate determination as
predictors of the future spot rate, including the forward rate.
When studying the Swedish data, one may want to look at the
time periods before, between, and after the two devaluations in
September 1981 and October 1982 separately. For instance, from
the whole period since January 1980 it does not seem as if the
currency basket index has been much more stable than the
bilate~al exchange rates. On the other hand, once the effects
8
Since the data are not sampled exactly at tihirty-day
intervals an error may be :introduced by the mismatch between
forward rates and the corresponding future 'spot rates.
Table 4.
Krona exchange rates, January 1980 - May 1987
Autocorrelationsb )
Countrya)
PI
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
PI0
P11
c
P12 Mean )
Std.dev. c )
St+l - St
Wes t Germany
U.S.A.
United Kingdom
Index
0.15 -0.04 -0.02 -0.06 0.01
0.01
0.03
0.09
0.17 0.17 0.19 -0.05
-0.02 -0.03 -0.06 -0.03 -0.16 -0.01
-0.12 -0.00 -0.05 -0.03 -0.03 -0.02
0.42
0.48
0.09
0.27
2.50
3.06
2.80
1.87
-0.06 0.04 0.07
-0.02 -0.04 -0.30
0.09 0.06 -0.02
0.03 0.02 -0.10
2.51
3.12
2.84
1.90
0.07
0.04
0.03 -0.10 -0.12 -0.01
0.13 0.10 0.13 0.10 -0.03 -0.07
0.08 -0.10 -0.02 0.04 0.10 0.06
-0.06 -0.03 -0.05 -0.00 -0.03 0.01
f t - St+1
Wes t Germany
U.S.A.
United Kingdom
Index
0.16
0.07
-0.01
0.12
0.04
0.12
-0.03
-0.01
-0.01
0.20
-0.04
-0.05
-0.04 0.02 0.02
0.20 0.22 -0.01
-0.02 -0.15 -0.01
-0.01 -0.02 0.00
0.02 -0.10 -0.11 -0.02
0.16 0.13 0.16 0.12
0.06 -0.11 -0.03 0.04
-0.06 -0.02 -0.03 -0.01
f t - St
West Germany
U.S.A.
United Kingdom
Index
0.54
0.72
0.67
0.60
0.44
0.50
0.51
0.41
0.45
0.42
0.37
0.31
0.37
0.32
0.26
0.24
0.20 0.10 0.11
0.24 0.22
0.30
0.09 -0.11 -0.16
0.07 0.05 -0.05
0.00 -0.04 -0.03 -0.02
0.04
0.32 0.22 0.11
-0.28 -0.29 -0.34 -0.32
-0.13 -0.17 -0.21 -0.26
-0.08
-0.02
-0.23
-0.20
0.50
0.18
0.07
0.18
0.22
0.27
0.23
0.23
a)
Note that the figures for West Germany and Uni ted Kingdom refer to krona exchange rates (krona/mark. krona/pound)
rather than dollar exchange rates (as in Tables 1-2). The relative change in "Index" is equal to I t +l - It.
b)
Under the hypothesis that the true autocorrelations are 0.0. the standard error of the sample autocorrelations is
about 0.106.
c)
The variables are measured on a percent per month basis (logarithmic differences have been multiplied by 100).
For example. the currency basket' s index has increased by an average of 0.27 per cent per month between February
1980 and June 1987.
U'1
0'\
- 157 -
of the devaluations are eliminated, it can be seen that the
standard deviation of the change in the index is much less than
that of either bilateral exchange rate (cf. Table 5).
Table 5.
Krona Exchange Rates, January 1980 - May 1987*
country
Jan 80 - July 81
Mean
St.dev.
Sep 81 - Aug 82
Mean
stedeve
Oct 82 - May 87
Mean
St.dev.
St+l - St
-0.59
1.52
0.26
1.04
0.33
1.42
U.S.A.
1.17
2.51
0.98
2.05
-0.27
2.39
united
Kingdom
0.11
2.48
0.49
1.42
-0.35
2e26
-0.05
0.35
0.11
0.49
-0.00
0.42
West
Germany
Index
f
t - St+l
1.04
1.62
0.07
1.09
0.23
1.41
U.S.A.
-1.14
2.50
-1.01
1.97
0.55
2.47
united
Kingdom
-0.09
2.68
-0.51
1@49
0.45
2 .. 30
0.20
0.60
-0.08
0.57
0.22
0.46
West
Germany
Index
f
t
....
St
Oe46
0.30
0.32
0.19
0855
0.17
U.S.A.
0.03
0.35
-0.03
0.23
0.28
0.18
united
Kingdom
0.02
0.39
-0.02
0.23
0.10
0.14
Index
Oe15
0.32
0.02
0.32
0.22
0.15
West
Germany
*
Cf. the notes to Table 4.
- 158 -
Evidently, there is autocorrelation in the forward premia (f~
s~) in Table 4. Exchange rate changes do not seem to be
autocorrelated, however, nor do the differences between forward
rates and future spot rates (except, perhaps, for the
krona/U.S. dollar exchange rate). This may seem surprising,
since
(4.9)
i.e., the sum of two variables that show no sign of
autocorrelation is highly correlated over time. The pattern is
the same in Fama's data. If we make the following definitions
of the forecast error,
i
i
St+l
tt+l
- E[S~+l]'
(4.10)
and the risk premium,
i
Pt
f~
-
E[S~+l]'
(4.11)
(4.9) can be written as
(4.12)
Fama suggests that the autocorrelation of the risk premium
and/or the expected changes in the exchange rate, which show up
in the forward premium, are dominated in the time series of
i i i
i
(St+l - St) and (f t - St+1) by the high variability of the
forecast error. This means that the observation that the
difference between the forward rate and the realized spot rate
appears to be white noise does not warrant the conclusion that
there is no risk premium.
We will make a regression test for the existence of a (possibly
time-varying and autocorrelated) risk premium on the currency
- 159 -
basket. Specifically, we test the hypothesis of unbiasedness of
the forward rate as a predictor of the future spot rate.
The hypothesis of unbiasedness can be tested using the
regression model
(4.13)
where the null hypothesis (no bias or zero risk premium)
implies that [a 1 , ~1] = [0, 1], and where superscripts have
been dropped. Under rational expectations ~t+1 is orthogonal to
(f t - St) and the parameters in (4.13) can be estimated by OLS.
This is thus a joint test of unbiasedness and rational
expectations.
Fama (1984) points out that since
(4.14)
an alternative to the regression model (4.13) may be formulated
as
(4.15)
where a 2
-a and ~2 = 1 - P1- In the empirical literature
1
both tests based on (4.13) and (4.15) are common.
A number of critical comments have been raised concerning the
interpretation of the results of OLS regressions like (4.13)
and (4.15). First, Hodrick and Srivastava (1986) point out that
if there is a time-varying risk premium, the estimates will be
biased. However, they also argue that this problem is unlikely
to be severe, a conjecture that is confirmed as results from
techniques that are not sUbject to bias confirm Fama's (1984)
findings. We will thus use the simpler OLS technique.
- 160 -
Second, as stressed by Gregory and McCurdy (1984, 1986), a
failure to reject the null hypothesis does not necessarily mean
that there is no time-varying risk premium. One should also
make sure that there are no signs of parameter instability or
residual autocorrelation. In consequence, we make several
diagnostic tests, including Chow tests of parameter instability
and Box-pierce tests for autocorrelation in the regression
residuals.
Third, it is well known that UIP and unbiasedness may be
violated even in the case of risk neutrality among investors,
due to Jensen's inequality. The problem is not important in
Frankel's (1982) simple model, where exchange rates are the
only stochastic variables, and it may be unimportant even in
practice (cf. McCulloch (1975) and Frenkel and Razin (1980».
However, Engel (1984) argues that for unbiasedness to be
economically meaningful, it should be formulated as a test of
the real return from speculation. Engel thus examines the
statistical properties of
(4.16)
where Ft and St are the levels of forward and spot exchange
rates, respectively (f = In F, s = In S), and Pt +1 is a
relevant price index. In Table 6 we give some descriptive
statistics of
(4.17)
which is approximately equal to e t + 1 • In our case, Pt + 1 is
measured by the Swedish consumer price index, and for
comparison the levels of exchange rates have also been
Table 6.
The realized excess real return on the forward market. January 1980 - May 1987
Autocorrelations
Country
PI
P2
P3
P4
u t +1
P5
= (f t
P6
0.16
0.06 -0.00 -0.03
0.02
U.S.A.
0.08
0.11
0.21 -0.02
0.20
0.01
0.13
0.01 -0.06 -0.01 -0.02
Pg
Plo
P11
P12
Mean Std.dev.
0.02 -0.10 -0.12
-0.01
-0.05
0.04
0.10
2.02
-0.04 -0.07
-0.31
3.56
0.13
0.12
0.08 -0.11 -0.03
0.04
0.09
0.03
-0.02
2.43
0.01 -0.06 -0.02 -0.04
0.01
-0.03
0.02
-0.08
1.60
United Kingdom -0.06 -0.02 -0.04 -0.02 -0.14 -0.01
Index
P8
- St+1)(St/P t+1)
West Germany
0.20
P7
0.14
0.12
'"
- 162 -
transformed to index form (with January 1980
= 1.0). 9
By comparing Tables 4 and 6, we can see that the descriptive
statistics for u t + 1 and (f t - St+1) are highly similar. While
theoretically motivated, Engel's (1984) objection to
regressions like (4.15) may thus be of little practical
importance. Engel also reports that regression analyses of u t +
1
(or, rather, e t +1 ) yield about the same results as those based
on (f t - St+l). As a check for robustness, we will nevertheless
run both the regression advocated by Fama (1984) (i.e., (4.13»
and an alternative regression suggested by Engel (1984).
Engel (1984) argues that a valid test for unbiasedness can be
based on the regression model
4
60 +
l
6 i u t +1 - i
+
Dt
+1 ,
(4.18)
i=l
where the null hypothesis of no bias implies that 0i = 0 (for
all i). It should be stressed that under the null hypothesis of
no risk premium, no variable in the information set should help
predict u t + 1 ; the choice of lagged uts is of course somewhat
arbitrary. For example, one might use the forward premium in
period t, which would make this test similar to Fama's
(1984).10
Finally, it should be noted that inferences based on
9
As noted by Engel (1984), the relevant price index is of a
representative risk neutral investor. While the Swedish CPI
seems a reasonable choice as far as the currency basket is
concerned, it may be less appropriate in the cases of the
bilateral exchange rates. Since we are not primarily
interested in the bilateral relations, the Swedish CPI will
be used throughout.
10 Engel (1984) also regresses u i + on lagged excess returns on
t 1
other currencies, u~. His conclusions are not affected.
- 163 -
regressions like (4.13) and (4.18) may be incorrect if c t + 1 and
v t + are heteroskedastic (although homoskedasticity is not
1
necessary for unbiasedness). Cumby and Obstfeld (1984) and
Engel (1984) use different versions of White's (1980)
heteroskedasticity test in their studies of (4.13) and (4.18),
respectively. Specifically, Cumby and Obstfeld (1984) examine
whether the forecast error c t + 1 is homoskedastic under the null
hypothesis of no bias, in which case c t + 1 = St+l - ft' and test
whether +1 = '2 = 0 in the regression
Alternatively, one may want to examine whether the residuals
A
associated with (4.13), e t +1 , are homoskedastic by testing
whether ~1 = ~2
0 in
or, following Engel (1984), whether all
T ••
J~
o
in
4
~
2
+
V Oi U t
+1- i +
i=1
4
+
4
2 2
j=l i=1
V ji U t
+1- j
Ut
+ 1- i +
~t+l
(4021)
In the following section, we will report the results from
applying (4.13), (4.18) and (4.19) - (4.21) on Swedish data.
4.5
REGRESSION RESULTS
The results from unbiasedness tests based on (4.13) and (4.18)
are reported in Tables 7 and 8, respectively. Separate
regressions have been run for the whole sample periOd, January
1980 - May 1987, and for the periOd after the devaluation in
- 164 -
October 1982. There are two reasons for our special interest in
the post-devaluation period. First, evidence presented by
McPhee (1984) and Englund, McPhee, and viotti (1985) indicates
that the elP arbitrage condition was violated prior to 1982
even on major currencies. Consequently, the unbiasedness tests
for that period cannot be interpreted as tests of UIP which is
our main concern. Second, one may argue that there was a regime
shift, as far as Swedish stabilization pOlicy is concerned, at
the time of the devaluation in 1982. The exchange rate target
was officially given a larger weight in policy formation, and
exchange rate expectations and risk premia should have been
affected by this change. Since one cannot determine a priori
whether any regime shift actually occurred, we view the
overlapping regressions as complementary.
Looking first at the estimates for the bilateral exchange rates
in Table 7, which are most easily compared to the results of
/ earlier studies, we find significant deviations from
unbiasedness for the dollar and the pound. For the latter
currency, however, the joint hypothesis [a 1 , P1] = [0, 1]
cannot be rejected at the 5 per cent level of significance (but
at the 10 percent level) when the whole sample period is
considered.
Table 7.
OLS regressions
A.
St+l - St
= a1 +
A.
~l(ft-st) + ~t+1
a.) January 1980 - May 1987
A.
Country
a
131
1
A.
A.
s(a )
1
s(Pl)
A.
He>
He
Q
DW
s(E.)
1.70
0.025
2 . 09
0 . 030
0.028
R2
(marg.sign.levels)
Wes t Germany
0.006
1.209
0.62
0.88
U.S . A.
0.005 -0.137
0.009M -2 . 181*
United Kingdom 0.002 -1 . 820*
Index
0.004
-o . 76OM
0 . 004
0.003
0 . 02
0.00
0.09
0.12
0.49
0.70
0.92
0 . 92
0.002
1.206
1.270
0.862
0.48
0,:83
A.
A.
seal)
s(13 1 )
He>
He
Q
0.18
0.44
0.69
0.57
0.99
0.40
0.98
2.04
1.76
0.019
0 . 00
0.04
0.02
0.01
b.) October 1982 - May 1987
A.
Country
a1
I
131
see)
R2
0.014
0.022
0 . 02
0.19
0.022
0.004
0.04
A.
DW
(marg.sign.levels)
West Germany
-0 . 003
0 .. 014*
United Kingdom -0.000
U.S.A
Index
0 . 001
1.. 180 0.006
-5.865* 0.006
-3.241* 0.004
-o . 43OM 0 . 001
1 . 140
1 . 668
2.077
0.375
0 . 49
~.OO
0.05
0 . 00
0.85
1.93
2.64
1.67
1.. 49
0.02
s(-) denotes standard error of estimate. * indicates that the coefficient is significantly different from its
value under the null hypothesis at the 5 per cent level. He> is a test of the joint hypothesis [als 131] = [Os 1].
He
is a O1ow test for structural stability. where the samples have been split in December 1983 in panel (a) and
December 1984 in panel (b) .. Q Is the Box-Pierce test for autocorrelation. The IIIlrginal significance levels of the
2
tests are based on the F-distribution (He> and
and the )( -distribution (Q). DW Is the Durbin-Watson statistic.
He>
2
and R
the conventional goodness-of-fit measure .
0'
U'1
Table 8.
OlS regressions
4 ,..
u t +1
=~
+ 1:1
°1 u t +1- i
,..
+ v t +1
a.) May 1980 - May 1987
,..
Country
6
"Y
0.000
(0.002)
U.S.A.
-0.002
(0.004)
United Kingdom 0.000
(0.003)
Index
-0.001
(0.002)
1
0.19OM*
West Germany
(0.111)
0.031
(0.110)
-0.078·
(0.112)
0.132
(0.112)
,..
,..
°
63
2
0.028
(0.112)
0.082
(0.107)
-0.037
(0.112)
0.004
(0.112)
,..
DW
s(E.)
2
R
A
6
4
h
o
He
Q
(marg.sign.levels)
-0.018
-0.030
(0.109)
(0.108)
0.181t8f 0.175
(0.106)
(0.108)
-0.047
-0.032
(0.112)
(0.112)
-0.059
0.005
(0.112)
(0.112)
0.64
0.93
0.96
2.00
0.020
0.04
0.15
0.12
0.78
2.06
0.035
0.09
0.98
0.44
0.93
2.01
0.025
0.01
0.86
0.81
0086
2.00
0.016
0.02
b.) February 1983 - May 1987
Country
West Germany
'Y
,..
6
1
0.002 -0.018
(0.002) (0.146)
U.S.A.
0.003 -0.051
(0.004) (0.145)
0.138
United Kingdom 0.002
(0.002) (0.146)
0.002* 0.159
Index
(0.001) (0.143)
,..
,..
°2
°3
0.100
(0.144)
0.241**
(0.142)
-0.158
(0.141)
,..
6
0'
0'
DW
s(~)
R2
A
4
hO
Q
He
(marg.sign.levels)
0.123
(0.140)
0.191
(0.142)
0.097
(0.143)
0.56
0.18 0.998
1.99
0.012
0.02
0.13
0.14 0.995
2.03
0.030
0.12
0.70
0.47 0.994
1.95
0.018
0.04
0.094
-o.238MM
-0.018
(0.139)
0.124
(0.144)
-0.047
(0.137)
O.ll
0.978
1.83
0.003
0.09
(0.136)
-0.026
(0.123)
0.00
(0.138)
in parentheses are standard errors. * (MM) indicates that the coefficient is significantly different from
zero at the 5 (10) percent level. hO is an F-test of the hypothesis that all regression coefficients are zero. Cf.
the notes to table 7 for further information.
~umbers
- 167 -
The P1 coefficients in the u.s. dollar and British pound
equations are markedly negative (although significantly
different from zero only in the case of the dollar). In these
respects our results are similar to Fama's (1984), although our
estimates are far greater in absolute values than his. In the
case of the u.s. dollar, the rejection of the unbiasedness
hypothesis is further strengthened by the fact that the
estimated equation shows signs of parameter instability (cf.
Table 7 a).
The results for the German mark are quite different and
although the P1 estimate for the whole sample is not
numerically close to unity, we cannot reject unbiasedness.
However, we cannot show that P1 is significantly different from
zero neither for the whole sample period nor for the
post-devaluation period, when the point estimate is close to
unity. This illustrates the imprecision and power problem
inherent in these tests. The hypothesis that the change in the
krona/German mark rate is pure white noise cannot be rejected.
These results can be compared to those presented for krona
exchange rates by Oxelheim (1985). He analyzes nonoverlapping
three month forward rates, 1974-84, for fiv~ currencies,
namely, those in Table 7 plus the Swiss franc and the Japanese
yen. In regressions comparable to ours (Table 4.27, p. 186), he
can in no case reject unbiasedness. The point estimates of P1
are all positive, but only for the pound is it significantly
different from zero. This gives an additional illustration of
the power problem in the tests, but the reasons for the marked
differences between his estimates and ours are difficult to
determine. Apart from using a different observation interval,
it should be noted that Oxelheim has five devaluations and the
shift to the currency basket system in 1977 in his sample
period. A priori, it seems likely that this should increase the
errors and tend to reduce the forecast power. What we find,
however, is point estimates that are closer to unity and
standard errors of estimates that are considerably smaller than
- 168 -
ours. 11 It is thus possible that there has been a change in the
relations between the krona and, in particular, the dollar and
the pound in recent years. Our analyses of the currency basket
system in sections 4.2 - 4.3 demonstrate, however, that this
need not be due to domestic events as the bilateral relations
are likely to be dominated by the internationally determined
premia (or discounts) on the currencies in question.
This brings us to the more interesting test of the ability of a
basket weighted index of forward premia to predict the future
relative change in the currency index. The results are reported
in the bottom lines of Tables 7 a - 7 b. The joint hypothesis
[a , P1] = [0, 1] can be rejected for the post-devaluation
1
period, but not for the whole sample. However, the P1 estimates
are significantly less than unity (although not significantly
different from zero), which indicates that the forward premium
does not provide an unbiased prediction of the index. The
coefficient of determination is far from impressive and
considerably smaller than in the regressions for the krona/U.S.
dollar and krona/pound rates. Whereas there is a significant
relationship between the krona/dollar forward premium and the
future change in the spot rate, albeit not at all the relation
predicted by the unbiasedness hypothesis,12 the changes in the
currency basket index are more or less unrelated to observed
forward premia (~1 being close to zero both numerically and
statistically).
Turning to the unbiasedness tests advocated by Engel (1984),
reported in Table 8, we find that the joint hypothesis that
realized excess real returns are white noise and thus
11 Oxelheim's (1985) PI estimate of 0.78 in the krona/dollar
regression is also in contrast to the generally negative
coefficients obtained by Fama (1984) for other dollar
exchange rates in a sample period similar to Oxelheim's.
12 In other words, dollar forward premia contain information
about future spot rate changes even though they are not
unbiased predictors.
- 169 -
impossible to predict from lagged returns, can be rejected for
the currency basket if the study is limited to post-devaluation
data. Coefficients are typically higher (in absolute terms) for
the latter period, but so are standard errors. There seems to
be a significant constant "excess return" on forward contracts
in currency basket terms, and u~_2 helps predict u~+l' at the
10 percent significance level (cf. the last row of Table 8 b).
In most cases, however, u + seems impossible to predict from
t 1
lagged ut's.
The homoskedasticity tests in Table 9 show, first, that there
is significant heteroskedasticity in (f t - St+1) for the
krona/U.S. doll~r exchange rate and the currency basket index
in the post-devaluation period (but only for the krona/pound
rate if the whole sample period is considered). To the extent
that the heteroskedasticity is reflected in a time-varying risk
premium, as suggested by Domowitz and Hakkio (1985) and Wolff
(1987), this result is consistent with our conclusions from
Table 7. Second, the residuals from the regressions in Tables
7-8 generally show no sign of heteroskedasticity, which means
that the inferences drawn are not invalidated.
- 170 -
Table 9.
Homoskedasticity tests
Dependent
variable Equation
[ft
-S
Sample
period
t + 1 ]2 (4.19) 80,1-87,5
82,10-87,5
(4.20) 80,1-87,5
82,10-87,5
(4.21) 80,5-87,5
83,2-87,5
4.6
country
Marginal Signi...
ficance levelCF-testl
West Germany
0.986
U.S.A.
united Kingdom
Index
0.810
0.041
0.989
West Germany
U.S.A.
united Kingdom
Index
0.454
0.023
0.717
0.002
West Germany
0.972
U.S.A.
united Kingdom
Index
0.679
0.267
0.985
West Germany
U.S.A.
united Kingdom
Index
0.409
0.723
0.377
0.604
West Germany
0.997
U.S.A.
united Kingdom
Index
0.992
0.998
0.948
West Germany
U.S.A.
united Kingdom
Index
0.414
0.940
0.083
0.351
CONCLUDING COMMENTS
Before we summarize our results, some statistical caveats
relating to our tests must be pointed out. In particular, one
may have some doubts about whether the innovations in the
currency index are normally distributed as implicitly assumed
in our analysis. As the pOlicy of the Riksbank is to keep the
- 171 -
index within a certain band around the benchmark value, the
normality assumption may not be justified when the index is
close to one of the limits (and when the limits are credible).
Experience should also have taught market participants that
there is a non-negligible risk of a large discrete change in
the benchmark value in the form of a devaluation.
Non-normality implies that classical significance tests (based
on the F and t distributions) are not valid. It has been argued
that the problem is one of small-sample inference. 13 If, e.g.,
agents (rationally) assign a positive probability to the event
of a large devaluation, while the econometrician's sample does
not include any, it will seem as if the market systematically
overestimates the rate of depreciation. Since there is
uniformly weaker evidence against unbiasedness when the Swedish
1981 and 1982 devaluations are included in the sample, the
findings from post-devaluation data should perhaps be
interpreted with caution.
However, it can also be argued that these problems of
non-normality are not so severe in the period under study.
First, the bounds for the currency index were not pUblicly
announced until JUly 1985. Prior to that, the central bank had
been working with a secret band which means that market
participants could never know for sure that the index could go
only in one direction. Second, the devaluation in October 1982
was announced as the definitely last attempt to cure the
imbalances in the Swedish economy by means of major exchange
rate changes. Although such an announcement in itself has
little information value, it seems to have gained credibility,
at least in a short run perspective. 'As we are studying one
month ahead forward rates, it can be hoped that our estimates
are not affected by these factors. To the extent that there
really was a regime shift in October 1982, data from an earlier
13 The problem has been analyzed theoretically by Obstfeld
(1987), and empirically by Boothe and Glassman (1987); these
papers also contain further references to earlier studies on
the SUbject.
- i72 -
period may be of limited interest to the question of Sweden's
monetary autonomy today. On the other hand, the risk associated
with exchange rate changes within the bounds may be rather
negligible in comparison with the risk of devaluations, as
indicated by the figures in Table 3. The theoretical,
empirical, and econometric role of devaluations is thus an
important question for future research.
with these caveats in mind, we can conclude that there are
theoretical reasons to believe that investors' risk aversion
should drive a wedge between domestic and foreign interest
rates in a currency basket system of the Swedish type. On
balance, our empirical results are also consistent with the
existence of a risk premium on the krona. A necessary condition
for Sweden to have some latitude for an independent monetary
policy would thus be fulfilled. The fact that we obtained m~xed
results in the bilateral tests illustrates our point that these
may be of limited interest for the question of monetary
independence in a country p~~suing a currency basket policy.
For example, the failure to establish a non-zero risk premium
(or, rather, to reject unbiasedness) on the krona relative to
the German mark cannot be interpreted as evidence of lack of
monetary autonomy. Rather, in light of the discussion in
section 4.3, it should be interpreted as an indication that the
risk premium which is due to the variability in the index
happens to be approximately equal (but opposite in sign) to the
premium which is due to- If international risk".
The conclusion that there is a risk premium does in no way
demonstrate that Swedish monetary policy has been effectively
used to control the domestic interest rate level, however. To
introduce a risk premium, all the authorities have to do is let
the currency index vary sUfficiently, but it is an entirely
different matter whether one can also influence the size of
that premium in any useful sense. In the simple mean-variance
model analyzed in section 4.3, there is a direct connection
between the risk premium and a policy variable, namely, the
- 173 -
stock of assets in the economy, summarized by the vector x t • As
discussed in Chapter 3, this implies that open market
operations can be used to influence the risk premium, just as
in conventional macro portfolio balance models. Although it
seems safe to assume that the conclusion that asset supplies
affect asset prices should hold also in more general models,
this very simple mechanism need not be invariant to
modifications in the underlying asset pricing model. The
questions of whether the risk premium can (and should) be
exploited for stabilization policy purposes deserve further
attention.
We should also stress that although we interpret our empirical
results as broadly consistent with the existence of risk
premia, it cannot be said that this proposition has been firmly
established. What we have found is that forward premia are not
very good, and typically biased, predictors of changes in
future spot rates. The source of the bias and the variables in
the information set that have larger predictive power are yet
to be detected. 14
In order to draw more specific conclusions about the nature of
risk premia in currency basket systems, as well as in other
policy regimes, one would have to go beyond the atheoretical
approach used in this chapter and test the explanatory power of
structural models along the lines of, e.g., Frankel (1982) and
Mark (1985).
14 The efficiency of the estimates in the bilateral relations
may, as pointed out in the introduction, be improved by use
of SUR rather than OLS. However, this is not a relevant
alternative for the regression analyses of the currency
basket, which is our main concern.
- 174 -
REFERENCES
Abraham, F. (1985), "Efficiency, Predictability and News on the
Foreign Exchange Markets. Floating Exchange Rates versus
Adjustable E.M.S. Rates", Weltwirtschaftliches Archiv,
Vol. 121, pp. 18-32.
Bailey, R.W., R.T. Baillie, and p.e. McMahon (1984),
"Interpreting Econometric Evidence on Efficiency in the
Foreign Exchange Market", Oxford Economic Papers, Vol. 36,
pp. 67-85.
Boothe, P. and D. Glassman (1987), "The statistical
Distribution of Exchange Rates. Empirical Evidence and
Economic Implications", Journal of International
Economics, Vol. 22, pp. 297-319.
Cumby, R.E. and M. Obstfeld (1984), "International
Interest-Rate and Price-Level Linkages under Flexible
Exchange Rates: A Review of Recent Evidence", in Bilson
and Marston, eds., Exchange Rate Theory and Practice,
University of Chicago Press/NBER, Chicago, pp. 121-151.
Diebold, F.X. and M. Nerlove (1986), "The Dynamics of Exchange
Rate Volatility: A MUltivariate Latent Factor ARCH Model",
Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, November
1986, mimeo.
Domowitz, I. and C.S. Hakkio (1985), "Conditional Variance and
the Risk Premium in the Foreign Exchange Market", Journal
of International Economics, Vol. 19, pp. 47-66.
Edison, H.J. and E. Vardal (1987), "Optimal Currency Basket in
a World of Generalized Floating. An Application to the
Nordic Countries", International Journal of Forecasting,
Vol. 3, pp. 81-96.
Edwards, s. (1982), "Exchange Rates and 'News': A
MUlti-Currency Approach", Journal of International
Money and Finance, Vol. 1, pp. 211-224.
Engel, C.M. (1984), "Testing for the Absence of Expected Real
Profits from Forward Market SpeCUlation", Journal of
International Economics, Vol. 17, pp. 299-308.
Englund, P., S. McPhee, and S. viotti (1985), "Ranteparitet
och ranteberoende" (Interest rate parity and interest rate
dependence), Ekonomisk Debatt, Vol. 13, pp. 275-288.
Fama, E.F. (1984), "Forward and spot Exchange Rates", Journal
of Monetary Economics, Vol. 14, pp. 319-338.
- 175 -
Frankel, J.A. (1982), "In Search of the Exchange Risk Premium:
A Six-Currency Test Assuming Mean-Variance Optimization",
Journal of International Money and Finance, Vol. 1, pp.
255-274.
Franzen, T., A. Markowski, and I. Rosenberg (1980), Effective
Exchange Rate Index - as a Guideline for Exchange Rate
Policy, Occasional Paper 1, Sveriges Riksbank (the Central
Bank of Sweden).
Franzen, T. and I. Rosenberg (1983), "Directing the Swedish
Exchange Rate", sveriges Riksbank Quarterly Review,
1/1983, pp. 24-40.
Frenkel, J.A. and A. Razin (1980), "Stochastic Prices and
Tests of Efficiency of Foreign Exchange Markets",
Economics Letters, Vol. 6, pp. 165-170.
Gregory, A.W. and T.H. McCurdy (1984), "Testing the
Unbiasedness Hypothesis in the Forward Foreign Exchange
Market: A Specification Analysis", Journal of
International Money and Finance, Vol. 3, pp. 357-368.
Gregory, A.W. and T.H. McCurdy (1986), "The Unbiasedness
Hypothesis in the Forward Foreign Exchange Market. A
Specification Analysis with Application to France, Italy,
Japan, the united Kingdom and West Germany", European
Economic Review, Vol. 30, pp. 365-381.
Haaparanta, P. and J. Kahkonen (1985), "spot and Forward
Exchange Rates and the Risk Premium in Forward Exchange:
Tests Using Finnish Data", Bank of Finland, mimeo.
Hodrick, R.J. and S. Srivastava (1984), "An Investigation of
Risk and Return in Forward Foreign Exchange", Journal of
International Money and Finance, Vol. 3, pp. 5-29.
Hodrick, R.J. and S. Srivastava (1986), "The Covariation of
Risk Premiums and Expected Future spot Exchange Rates",
Journal of International Money and Finance, Vol. 5,
Supplement, March, pp. 5-21.
Hooper, P. and J. Morton (1982), "Fluctuations in the Dollar:
A Model of Nominal and Real Exchange Rate Determination",
Journal of International Money and Finance, Vol. 1, pp.
39-56.
Horngren, L. and S. viotti (1985), "Foreign Exchange Movements
and Monetary Policy - An Analysis of the Outflow of
Foreign Currency from Sweden in the Spring of 1985",
Skandinaviska Enskilda Banken Quarterly Review 2/1985, pp.
46-55.
- 176 -
Margarita, A. (1987), "Risk Premia and the Foreign Exchange
Market. The European Monetary System Versus the 'Rest of
the World''', Economics Letters, Vol. 23, pp. 95-98.
Mark, N.C. (1985), "On Time Varying Risk Premia in the Foreign
Exchange Market. An Econometric Analysis", Journal of
Monetary Economics, Vol. 16, pp. 3-18.
McCulloch, J.H. (1975), "Operational Aspects of the Siegel
Paradox", Quarterly Journal of Economics, Vol. 89, pp.
170-175.
McPhee, S.E. (1984), "Covered Interest Parity in Swedish
Capital Markets, 1974-1984", mimeo, Stockholm School of
Economics.
Meese, R.A. and K. Rogoff (1983), "Empirical Exchange Models of
the Seventies: Do They Fit Out of Sample?", Journal of
International Economics, Vol. 14, pp. 3-24.
Merton, R.C. (1973), "An Intertemporal Capital Asset Pricing
Model", Econometrica, Vol. 41, pp. 867-887.
Obstfeld, M. (1987), "Peso Problems, Bubbles, and Risk in the
Empirical Assessment of Exchange-Rate Behavior", NBER
Working Paper No. 2203.
Oxelheim, L. (1985), International Financial Market
Fluctuations, John Wiley, London.
Stulz, R.M. (1982), "The Forward Exchange Rate and
Macroeconomics", Journal of International Economics, Vol.
12, pp. 285-299.
White, He (1980), "A Heteroskedasticity~Consistent
Covariance Matrix Estimator and a Direct Test for
Heteroskedasticity", Econometrica, Vol. 48, pp. 817-838.
Wolff, C.C.P. (1987), "Forward Foreign Exchange Rates,
Expected spot Rates, and Premia: A Signal-Extraction
Approach", Journal of Finance, Vol. 42, pp. 395-407.
- 177 -
5. The Current Account, Supply Shocks
and Accommodative Fiscal Policy*
5.1.
INTRODUCTION
In policy discussions in small open economies the current
account is frequently used as an important macroeconomic
information variable or intermediate target. This practice is,
explicitly or implicitly, based on certain opinions about what
factors are important in explaining and forecasting the current
account It is, e.g., a widely held view that domestic wages
and the terms of trade play important roles. Changes in
national saving are also often seen as indicating that
stabilization policy is overly expansive or contractive. In ex
post interpretations of the current account development "wage
shocks", "price shocks", and "policy shocks" are prominent
"explanations". The primary aim of this chapter is to assess
the importance of these types of shocks for the Swedish current
account development during the post-war period.
0
*
This chapter was written together with Peter Englund. We
have received comments, criticism, and advice from several
people. In particular, we wish to thank Tom Cooley, Nils
Gottfries, Thor Gylfason, David Hendry, Torsten Persson,
Jim Stock, and Lars Svensson.
- 178 -
Recent theoretical work analyzing the current account in an
intertemporal general equilibrium framework teaches that the
directions of the effects of various macroeconomic disturbances
are in general ambiguous and depend crucially on the exact
nature of the model studied; see, e.g., Obstfeld (1982),
Svensson and Razin (1983), and Persson and Svensson (1985) on
the Harberger-Laursen-Metzler (terms of trade) effect; Svensson
(1984) on the effects of oil price and labor supply changes
under sticky and flexible wages; Sachs (1982) and Razin (1984)
on the effects of changes in government spending, etc.
In trying to use these theoretical model structures as a basis
for econometric studies of the current account we face the
well-known problem that factors taken to be sources of
exogenous disturbances in the analytical model (terms of trade,
labor supply, government expenditures, etc.) cannot plausibly
be assumed to be strictly exogenous in the econometric model.
The endogeneity of most relevant factors is well illustrated by
a brief sketch of the Swedish post-war current account history
(see e.g. Lindbeck (1975), Lundberg (1985) and Bosworth and
Rivlin (1987) for more thorough treatments of Swedish
stabilization policy). Some relevant data are plotted in
Figures la-d.
The current account deficits in 1947-48 and surpluses in
1949-53 have been viewed as consequences of the development of
the nominal exchange rate, the terms of trade and real wages.
In 1946 the krona was allowed to appreciate in an attempt to
insulate the Swedish price level from the international
inflationary tendencies. In 1949, in contrast, the krona
depreciated by ten per cent against the most important trading
partners' currencies. This shock to the exchange rate was
followed by a gradual decline of the real wage. The terms of
trade fell temporarily, but improved (likewise temporarily)
when raw materials prices rose during the Korea war boom.
-
Figure 1 a:
179 -
Current account/price of imports
7500
5000
2500
o
-2500
-5000
-7500
-1 0000
-""--r--T-Y-~--y---r--'---r--T----,---r--v-.,..--...--r---,--,---.---r-"'--':-T--r----'---Y--"----'r--T---r--r---r---,---,.--,,......,..---r---.-
1950
Figure 1 b:
1950
1955
1960
1965
1910
1975
1980
1985
Log of real government consumption
1955
1960
1965
1970
1975
1980
1985
-
Figure 1 c:
180 -
Log 6f terms.' of trade
0.4
0.3
0.2
O. 1
0.0
-0.1
-0.'2
-0.3
1950
Figure 1 d:
1955
1960
1965
1970
1975
1980
1985
1965
1970
1975
1980
1985
Log. of re.al wage
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5-
0.0
-0.5
1950
1955
1960
- 181 -
The current account was approximately balanced over the decade
1954-1964, perhaps due to successful stabilization policies.
The stimulative and contractive measures undertaken in the
following decade do not appear to have been equally well timed.
It has been claimed that fiscal policy shocks account both for
the current account deficits in the late 1960's and the
surpluses in 1971-1973.
The first half of the 1970's may be characterized by the
combination of large supply shocks and policy shocks. When the
world economy, following the first oil crisis, turned into a
recession and the Swedish terms of trade deteriorated, Swedish
economic policy was aimed at preserving a high level of
employment. Government expenditures continued to increase
rapidly, particularly in relation to the stagnating private
sector development. International inflation, in combination
with the design of economic policy, is believed to be the main
cause behind the extreme increases in nominal wages: more than
40 per cent during 1975-76. Real wages also rose rapidly,
despite the downward trend in the terms of trade. These
developments were accompanied by a current account deterioration much stronger than the OECD average; cf. Sachs (1981).
The second half of the 1970's was a period of inflation and
government budget and current account deficits. It is believed
that the lingering external balance problems reflect a lag in
the adjustment of real wages and overall spending to the
international stagnation. It is also believed that the
accommodative design of macroeconomic policies hindered a more
rapid adjustment. Devaluations were undertaken in 1976, 1977,
1981, and 1982. Real wages started to fall in 1978, but tbe
current account remained in deficit until 1984.
Interpretations of economic history tend to view causation as
going from policy and external shocks to the variable of
interest, in our case the current account. Such interpretations
are complicated by the fact that some shifts in supply curves
.. 182 ..
and policy have not been autonomous but are closely related to
each other and to the development of the current account. The
deterioration of the current account and budget balances in the
1970's may, e.g., be explained by increases in government
spending in the form of employment benefits or public
employment that resulted from the terms of trade and wage
shocks, as suggested by Soderstrom and viotti (1979). But some
economists have argued that there may be a reverse causation in
that the frequency and size of wage disturbances depend on the
government's choice whether to accommodate supply shocks or not
(see, e.g., Calmfors and Horn (1986». Further, the current
account may serve as a target for government policy. This has,
e.g., been suggested by Summers (1987) as an explanation of the
Feldstein and Horioka (1980) finding that savings and
investment rates tend to be highly correlated. For a statement
by Swedish policy makers about the importance attached to the
current account see Heikensten and Asbrink (1986). See also
Soderstrom (1984) for a discussion of the relation between the
current account and fiscal policy.
In accounting for interdependencies such as those mentioned
above in econometric work there are two basic approaches. One
is to attempt to formulate and estimate a structural model
incorporating reaction functions on part of unions and the
public sector. The alternative is to recognize that with many
competing structural models, and the absence of strong prior
beliefs in the correctness of any of these, the data should be
allowed to speak for themselves with only a minimum of
identifying assumptions imposed.
In this chapter, we choose the latter alternative and estimate
a vector autoregression (VAR) model with the current account,
the real wage, the terms of trade and government consumption.
We use the estimated model to illuminate the role played by
various shocks to the development of these variables. Following
Sims and others, this is done by techniques of "innovation
accounting" and "impulse response" analyses. In order to be
- 183 -
able to do this we specify, and put restrictions on, a
structural model that allows us to identify innovations to this
model from the estimated VAR system. Our use of VAR analysis in
this way follows recent work by Sims (1986), Blanchard and
Watson (1986), and Bernanke (1986).
Our theoretical and methodological framework is discussed in
the next section, and the empirical results are presented and
interpreted in section 5.3. A principal result is that the
forecast error variance in the current account is to a very
limited extent accounted for by shocks to the terms of trade,
wage, or government consumption. We suggest that domestic
productivity shocks and domestic and international demand
shocks may be the dominant sources of current account
variations. In contrast, terms of trade shocks are a major
source behind the uncertainty about the development of the real
wage.
5.2
THE ECONOMETRIC MODEL
Our purpose is to assess the impact and importance of various
types of shocks on the Swedish current account by means of
interpreting estimated vector autoregressions via impulse
response functions and innovation accounting. The impulse
response is the analog of a comparative static effect, i.e.,
the effect over time on a certain endogenous variable from a
particular shock holding other stochastic terms fixed.
Innovation accounting amounts to a decomposition of the
variance of the forecast error of a certain variable into the
contributions of the different shocks to the system.
An unrestricted vector autoregression model can be seen as a
reduced form from any of a family of structural models
containing the variables included in the VAR system. Hence, the
residual in a particular equation will be some combination of
shocks to the underlying model. This means that in order to
give a structural meaning to the variance decompositions and
- 184 -
impulse response functions we have to make assumptions that
allow us to identify the shocks to the structural model.
In section 5.2.1 we outline a model of a small open economy,
which is broadly in line with recent models aimed at analyzing
pOlicy options in small open economies with strong labor unions
and a large pUblic sector; see, e.g., Persson and Svensson
(1987). This model provides a framework for interpreting the
results. Specifically, we use it to motivate our choice of
variables to include in the VAR system and the assumptions made
that enable us to identify the structural shocks. Following a
brief description of the VAR methodology in section 5.2.2 the
identification problem is discussed in section 5.2.3.
5.2.1
A model of the current account
Almost all recent analytical studies of the determinants of the
current account employ a deterministic framework. 1 Several
authors, e.g., Persson and Svensson (1985), analyze the
difference between fully anticipated and fully unanticipated
disturbances in deterministic terms, but there are no
stochastic models in the literature that are sUfficiently rich
to serve directly as a framework for econometric modelling. The
model presentation in this section follows the standard
practice of grafting a simple stochastic structure onto a
deterministic model.
The following features of the model are worth emphasizing.
First, it is a real model, where inflation and nominal exchange
rates are absent. Second, neither wages nor goods prices are
necessarily market clearing, but are thought of as being set by
labour unions and other price setters without full information
1
One exception is the work by Clarida (1986a,b) analyzing
stochastic general equilibrium models of a world comprised
of a continuum of small economies all SUbject to
productivity shocks. Surpluses and deficits to the balance
of payments result from the desire to smooth consumption
relative to the income pattern.
- 185 -
about contemporaneous market conditions. Third, government
expenditure is taken to be endogenous with the aim of
accommodating tendencies to unemployment that may result from
private sector behaviour. Fourth, exports may be large relative
to world market demand, i.e., the terms of trade are not a
priori assumed to be strictly exogenous.
The equations in the model are sUbjected to a vector of
fundamental stochastic shocks, u t ' which are serially
uncorrelated. The model contains both contemporaneous and
lagged variables, but we will not be explicit about the exact
role played by the lagged variables. They may represent the
direct impact of past decisions due to transactions and
adjustment costs as well as the informational content in past
observations for making predictions about the future. We are
also agnostic about what lagged variables enter into what
equation and simply represent all lagged variables by an
unspecified vector 0t-1 which is the same in each equation. In
contrast a careful specification of contemporaneous
interactions is crucial in order to discuss how the various
structural shocks may be identified from the estimated VAR
system.
A crucial step in any vector autoregression is the choice of
variables to include. In the present study we limit ourselves
to four: the current account, the terms of trade, the real
wage, and government consumption. At this stage one aspect of
this choice merits mentioning. As the modern theory of current
account determination is explicitly intertemporal it would be
natural to include an interest rate among the variables. Our
reason for not doing so is that regulations both in the
domestic credit market and with regard to international capital
flows have for most of the period under study been so prominent
in Sweden as to make interest series hard to interpret. It is
an important challenge for research, however, to construct a
data series that adequately represents the rate of discount
relevant to Swedish decision makers.
- 186 -
We may now outline the model. There are two goods. The
production of home goods, Y, is used both for consumption, ch ,
and investment, I, with the remainder being supplied to the
world market. with market clearing world market prices exports,
X, equals Y - ch - I. In general we do not assume prices to
clear the export market, however, as is further discussed
below. Foreign goods are used for consumption, c f , and as
intermediary inputs in production, M.
The focus of analysis is on the current account defined by
(5.1)
where Ft is net foreign assets, r t is the interest rate, and Pt
is the price of home goods in terms of foreign goods, i.e., the
terms of trade. Foreign assets evolve according to
(5.2)
The representative firm produces home goods using capital, K,
labour, Lh , and intermediary goods, M, as inputs;
where u Y is a productivity shock. The firm maximizes its market
value treating the price of home goods, p, and the wage level,
w, as exogenously given. Both these prices are in terms of the
world market price of foreign goods which serves as the
numeraire. This gives rise to the factor demand equations
~t
(5.4)
(5.5)
- 187 -
(5.6)
where the lagged variables 0t-1 are relevant due to adjustment
costs and/or in affecting expectations, and there are separate
but possibly correlated shocks to each of the factor demand
equations. On the other hand, factor demands are unaffected by
the current productivity shock u~ which we assume is not
observed by firms when hiring decisions are made. The rate of
discount should also enter the factor demand equations, but it
is suppressed since it will not be a part of our VAR
representation of the model. The development of the capital
stock is given by
(5.7)
where 6 is the rate of depreciation.
The pUblic sector produces government consumption goods
according to the production function
(5.8)
In deciding about employment in the pUblic sector the
government attempts to offset variations in private sector
employment that result from union set wages. It also tries to
adjust pUblic employment in order to supply G according to
consumer preferences. In these decisions it uses whatever
available information variables that are related to its goals.
We assume that the government observes contemporaneous prices,
i.e. p and w, but not contemporaneous quantities, e.g. CA or
y.2 We may then write the government's decision rule as
(5.9)
2
One motivation for this assumption may be that national
accounts statistics are typically produced with a lag of at
least a quarter.
- 188 -
The fiscal policy shock u g may be seen as representing the
peculiarities of the political decision making process and the
preferences of the ruling party.
The representative consumer maximizes discounted expected
lifetime utility, with instantaneous utility derived from the
consumption of home goods, ch , foreign goods, c f , government
goods, G, and working time. The working week is fixed and all
consumers want to work. Assuming labour demand not to exceed
potential supply this means that working time is given by Lh +
Lg . The representative consumer can then be viewed as
maxlmlzlng utility over ch and c f restricted by his net wealth,
defined as the discounted value of future production net of
taxes minus foreign indebtedness, and by given values of G and
h + Lg • This gives rise to demand functions
L
j
h, f,
(5.10)
where the interest rate is again suppressed. Preferences are
assumed to be sUbjected to random shocks. Note that taxes are
not present in (5.10), which means that we have imposed the
assumption of "Ricardian equivalence". This is a strictly
empirical hypothesis, which will be indirectly tested as we
check the sensitivity of our regression results to the
inclusion of the government budget balance.
Wages are set by the the representative labor union, which
maximizes the expected discounted utility of its representative
member. In doing this it takes the full structure of the model
into account. This means that it has the same maximand as the
union member, but it maximizes over the wage restricted by its
expectations of the economy's resource constraint. We assume
that the labour union may possibly observe the current value of
government consumption, G, and the terms of trade, P, but not
the current values of production or the current account.
Alternatively, it may be assumed that the union maximizes a
- 189 -
function of real wages and employment, in which case the
current value of CA is not a relevant variable, not being an
argument in either the factor demand functions or the pUblic
sector decision function. These considerations give rise to
(5.11)
The wage shock UW represents the particular preferences of the
union leadership, e.g., the weight put on real wages in
relation to employment.
We assume that import prices are exogenously determined, the
reason for this being that the country is small relative to the
market for foreign goods. On the other hand, we assume that the
domestic production of the representative home good is large
relative to the size of the world market for these goods, and
so the volume of exports may have an impact on world market
prices. This, of course, is not in conflict with the assumption
made above that the representative domestic firm is a price
taker in the world market. The world market demand curve for
home goods may be written
(5.12)
where UX is a shock to world market demand and the vector 0
represents relevant variables in the information sets of
international agents. Assuming market clearing (5.12) may be
inverted to yield the terms of trade as a function of exports
(5.13)
Alternatively world market prices may be taken to be
pre-determined. More precisely it is assumed that prices are
set without access to any contemporaneous information, in
particular about current supply. This implies that the terms of
trade equation should be written
- 190 -
(5.14)
where ui is a~ shock to the price setters' behavior. Note the
difference in interpretation between the shocks to (S.13) and
(S.14). with contemporaneous market clearing a price shock is a
shock to the world market demand curve. with predetermined
prices uP is an autonomous shock to price setting which is
unrelated to the contemporaneous demand shock.
If P is predetermined the home country may find itself rationed
in the export market. Let us assume that the export volume is
given by the minimum of demand and supply, i.e.,
if Yt -
c~ -
It < X(Pt , 0t-l'
U~)
,(S.lS)
X(
Pt'
0
x)
t-l' Ut
if Yt -
c~ -
It
~
X(Pt' 0t-l'
U~)
where Pt is given by (S.14). We must also make assumptions
about what happens with those goods that are not exported when
y - c h - I ~ X(p, 0, u X ). The simplest assumption is that they
are neither storable to the next period nor made available for
consumption and investment in the present period.
Alternatively, they may be stored and supplied to the market in
the next period. In any case the decision problem facing the
agents in the economy will be affected relative to a world of
market clearing. In particUlar there will be an extra
intertemporal link in that today's world market prices will
affect tomorrow's decisions via its effects on the inventories
carried over. This will not, however, introduce any new
arguments into any of the equations as defined above as lagged
world market prices are contained in the vector O.
Let us now rewrite the model in terms of the four endogenous
variables w, G, CA, and p. Among these w is already expressed
as a function of G and p by (S.ll), and government consumption
- 191 '
is simply given by sUbstituting (5.9) into (5.8) as
(5.16)
Further, sUbstitution from (5.2) - (5.10) and (5.15) into (5.1)
yields
where UX(Ui,Uh ) only appears to the extent that domestic export
supply does not fall short of (exceed) the demand for exports.
Finally, we have the terms-of-trade equation. with p
predetermined it is simply given by (5.14). with
contemporaneous market clearing substitution from (5.1) into
(5.13) gives p as a function of CA, e f , and M. After
substitution from (5.2) - (5.4), (5.6), (5.8), and (5.10) we
then have
(5.18)
Equations (S.ll), (S.16), (5.17) and (5.18), or (5.14), form an
interdependent system from which CAt' Pt' Gt , and wt can be
solved as functions of the vector u t and nt - 1 . In order to
understand what information we may gain about this system from
a vector autoregression we will devote the next section to a
brief methodological overview.
S.2.2
A
vector autoregression methods
vector autoregression model is a system of n equations
Z(t)
C(L)Z(t) + vet),
(S.19)
where Z(t) is a variable vector, C(L) is a matrix of lag
- 192 -
polynomials defined by
s > 0
and vet) is a vector of white noise residuals. This system can
be seen as a reduced form of the "structural" model
Z(t) = BOZ(t) + B(L)Z(t) + Au(t),
(5.20)
where BO is a coefficient matrix of contemporaneous relations
(with zeros on the diagonal), B(L) a matrix of lag polynomials,
u(t) a vector of structural disturbances, and A a coefficient
matrix. Off-diagonal elements of A indicate that a structural
disturbance affects more than one equation. The elements of u
are assumed to be uncorrelated, i.e. E(utuf) = ~ is a diagonal
matrix. The coefficients and residuals in the reduced form VAR
model are related to the structural model by
C(L)
(5.21)
vet) = Bov(t) + Au(t).
(5.22)
Equation (5.22) is a purely contemporaneous structural model.
Since there are n(n+l)/2 distinct elements in the variance
covariance matrix vv' and I is diagonal, giving n variances to
estimate, it is possible to identify a maximum of n(n-1)/2
distinct parameters of .B O ahd A.
The estimated VAR model may be used to do innovation accounting
and to calculate impulse response functions. To do this rewrite
the VAR model into the moving average system '
Z(t)
H(L)
H(L)u(t), where
(5.23)
(5.24)
- 193 -
The moving average representation (5.23) is sometimes called
the impulse response function as it gives the impact on the
vector Z in period t of a specific innovation in a certain
earlier period. Based on this representation of the model one
may also decompose the variance of the k period ahead forecast
error of variable i into the effects of the variances of the
innovations,
k-1
l l
s=O j
(5.25)
where Hs(ij) is an element of the coefficient matrix H(L) at
lag l~ngth s and OJ is the j-th diagonal element of ~. A
decomposition of the variance for the i-th variable into the
contributions of innovations in the different structural
equations j is calleg innovation accounting.
As should be clear from this discussion innovation accounting
and impulse response calculations are done based on a
particular orth09onalizatlon of the errors to the VAR system.
The appropriate way to do this is to identify and estimate the
parameters ot BO and,A in the structural contemporaneous model
(5.22). The most widely used method for doing this assumes that
A = I and that the BO matrix is lower triangular, i.e., that
the contemporaneous model is recursive. In this case the
parameters of Bo may be estimated by OLS.
5.2.3
Identifying assumptions
Our model of the current account summarized in equations
(5.11), (5.16), (5.17), and (5.18), or (5.14), can be rewritten
so that it corresponds to the structural model (5.20). We
assume that the vector 0t-1 consists only of lagged values of
the endogenous variables in this model. Then the reduced form
of the model is a system of vector autoregression equations
corresponding to (5.1-9) stating CAt' Wt ' Pt' and Gt as
functions of lagged values of these variables and
- 194 -
contemporaneous shocks. We note that our structural model is
highly interdependent. In particular this is so under the
assumption of market clearing with the terms of trade given by
(5.18). In that case the assumptions made about contemporaneous
interactions only restrict two of the (off-diagonal) parameters
of the matrix corresponding to BO to zero; Gt and wt do not
depend on CAt. Further, the (composite) shocks to the terms of
trade and current account equations are correlated even if all
elements of the vector u are assumed uncorrelated.
To achieve identification we will assume that prices are
predetermined according to (5.14). This may either be
interpreted as a small country assumption, in which case prices
are exogenous, or as an assumption that prices are fixed by
long term contracts that are made without information about the
current state of the world. Predetermined terms of trade
ensures that shocks are uncorrelated across equations. Let us
further assume that wt does not depend on Gt , i.e., that the
labour unions in setting the wage level only have access to
information about current terms of trade, whereas the
government in deeiding about pUblic expenditure can observe
both current terms of trade and wages. In other words, we
assume that the labor union does not know the extent to which a
wage disturbance will be accommodated by fiscal policy.
These assumptions give us a recursive system with the ordering
p - w - G - CA, i.e., the matrix corresponding to BO is lower
triangular under this ordering, and its elements may be
estimated by OLB regression of the residuals from a standard
VAR estimation. Assuming the elements of u to be uncorrelated
the matrix corresponding to A will be an identity matrix. It is
now possible to interpret each shock as pertaining to a
particular equation of the structural model. The wage, terms of
trade, and government consumption shocks correspond directly to
u W, uP, and ug , and the current account shock, which we denote
by u ca , is some combination of export demand, domestic
productivity, factor demand and preference shocks.
- 195 -
since the model is exactly identified it is not possible to
test the identifying assumptions. What may be done is to
investigate the sensitivity of the results, i.e. the impulse
response functions and the variance decompositions, to
alternative exactly identifying assumptions. 3 If the results
would vary strongly when such untestable assumptions were
altered this could be seen as an indication that it is not
possible to make any structural interpretation of the
innovations. On the other hand, if results were relativ~ly
insensitive, this might indicate that it was permissible to
regard the innovations as shocks to the structural equations.
It bears emphasizing that by investigating alternative
identifying assumptions we do not just mean mechanically
changing the recursive ordering, a practice which was common in
early VAR studies and which is forcefully criticized by Cooley
and LeRoy (1985). Indeed there is only one other recursive
ordering (p - G - W - CAl that is compatible with our
theoretical model, and if p was not taken to be predetermined
the system would be fundamentally non-recursive, since CAt by
definition depends on Pt. Such non-recursivity would affect the
estimation methods which could be by instrumental variables as
in Blanchard and Watson (1986) or by methods of moments as in
Bernanke (1986). Further it would affect the structural
interpretation of the innovations; e.g., the terms-of-trade
innovation would now reflect, among other things, the
innovation to export demand.
It may be regarded as a weakness that results are potentially
sensitive to untestable identifying assumptions. It need be
kept in mind, however, that the alternative modelling strategy,
to which VAR analysis is a reaction, is to impose a lot of
overidentifying restrictions at the outset. Vector
autoregressions may be regarded as a way of investigating how
3
See Blanchard (1986) for an example of systematic
sensitivity testing.
- 196 -
far, if anywhere, one can get with a minimum of structural
assumptions.
In the next"section we report the results of a study where we
first estimate an unrestricted vector autoregression
corresponding to (5.19), then estimate the parameters of Bo and
~ based on the assumed recursive ordering p-w-G-CA and finally
use these estimates for innovation accounting and impulse
response calculations, where we identify the innovations as
innovations to particular structural equations.
5.3
5.3.1
RESULTS
Data·description
Our four variable VAR system is estimated on quarterly
observations from 1948:2 to 1985:3. The data series used are
plotted in Figures la-d. The terms of trade (p) are defined as
the ratio between the export and import price indices. The real
wage (w) is the index for labor costs in the industrial sector
divided by the import price index. For real government
consumption (G) no quarterly series exists before 1970. We have
constructed quarterly data prior to 1970 by using the yearly
government consumption series together with the quarterly
series of central government expenditure. Similarly, no
quarterly data for the current account (CA) exist before 1970.
The series used has been constructed from the quarterly trade
balance statistics. See appendix A for further details.
The original current account and government consumption series
showed marked seasonal patterns. Due to our construction of the
quarterly data for the earlier years these patterns were
different before and after 1970. The terms of trade and the
real wage on the other hand show no clear seasonalities (cf.
- 197 -
Figures 1c-d). In our estimations we have thus used seasonally
adjusted series of G and CA, where the seasonal components have
been calculated from OLS regressions of each series on
quarterly dummies and a set of powers of time. Different
regressions were run for the two sUbperiods; see appendix B for
further details on the seasonal adjustment of the data.
Quarterly dummy variables were included in the estimated VAR
system to capture possible deficiencies in the method used for
deseasonalization.
Before presenting the estimated model, we should comment on the
problem of drawing inferences from vector autoregressions of
non-stationary data. Table C1 in appendix C gives the results
of testing whether the univariate time series are integrated of
order one, i.e., whether their first differences are
stationary. For each of the series contained in our model we
find that first order integration cannot be rejected. This is
well in accord with the results of Nelson and Plosser (1982).
We have not, however, tested for the presence of cointegration
among these series, i.e., whether linear combinations of any of
the series are stationary. with more than two variables, and
the possibility of more than one cointegrating vector, such
testing becomes quite complex; see Engle (1987) for a survey
and a discussion. Since we are not interested in cointegration
per se we have chosen to estimate our model on the original
data in levels despite their possible non-stationarity. In
doing this we rely on results of Sims, Stock and Watson (1987)
showing that the asymptotic distribution for the coefficient
estimates of an unrestricted vector autoregression in levels is
identical with that for a model where the cointegrating vector
is known exactly a priori and this is imposed as a restriction
on the estimation. 4
4
In small samples on the other hand there are differences.
Engle and Yoo (1987) report a Monte Carlo forecasting
experiment, comparing a vector autoregression in levels with
the Engle and Granger (1987) two step method. They find that
the former yields better forecasts over very sho'rt horizons
but that the latter is superior after about four periods.
- 198 -
We have investigated the sensitivity of our results by running
a regression on differenced data, which would be the
appropriate thing to do if the series were first-order
integrated but not cointegrated. The differences in results are
mostly minor with one or two exceptions which will be commented
on below.
5.3.2
The estimated VAR model
The estimated VAR system is presented in appendix C, Table C2.
It includes four quarters of lagged variables. None of the
equations show significant residual autocorrelation. 5 The
covariance matrix of the residuals is displayed in Table 1.
There is considerable correlation between the residuals of the
wage, price and current account equations, whereas the residual
associated with government consumption appears largely
uncorrelated with the other residuals.
5
When estimating on first differenced data there is
significant autocorrelation in the current account equation.
- 199 -
Table 1
Covariance matrix of residuals
(Entries below the diagonal are correlations.)
v
v
V
v
p
V
w
p
.00092
0.00032
w
.36
.00087
.003
-.09
G
v
CA
.26
.27
v
g
.000003
v
CA
10.883
- .. 00008
10.999
.00088
-2.007
1.859.400
-.05
Table 2
Tests of Marginal Predictive Power of (4 lags of)
Row Variables for Column Variables
(Marginal Significance Levels)
p
w
P
.000
.000
.503
.969
w
.422
.000
.105
.887
G
.006
0196
"QOQ
,,293
CA
.636
.262
.768
.000
G
CA
Chow tests indicate some parameter instability within the
sample period. Dividing the sample in 1970 gives significant
differences between the sUbperiods for the terms of trade and
wage equations. Since the Korea boom is often found to be hard
to accommodate within the same model as the period thereafter
we also estimated the model for 1954:2-1985:3. Again, Chow
tests show signs of instability of the terms of trade and wage
equations before and after 1970. While the main results remain
unaltered between the periods we shall see that there are some
interesting differences, e.g., with regard to the exogeneity of
-
200 -
the terms of trade.
Even though the estimated system in itself is not of primary
interest a few brief comments should be made. It is striking
that the variables included contribute much less to explaining
the variations of the current account than they do for the
other variables; the coefficient of determination is only .44
for this equation against over .9 for the other equations. 6
Considering that the current account is the difference between
two macroeconomic aggregates it may not be surprising that it
is harder to predict than the other series. It is a bit
surpr1s1ng, though, that the explanatory power is so low,
considering the fact that we have taken account of the
variation in three variables which are usually thought of as
the most important sources behind the fluctuations in the
current account.?
The trend terms turn out to be relatively unimportant. They are
quantitatively rather small, and three out of four are not
significantly different from zero. The only significant trend
term is that of the terms of trade equation, which contributes
to a quarterly decline of the Swedish terms of trade by .19
percent.
In general we find that few variables other than lagged values
of the dependent variable itself are significant. Table 2 gives
the results of Granger causality tests, i.e., tests for the
marginal predictive power of all lagged values of a variable in
6
For the sUbperiod 1946-69 it is not even possible to reject
the hypothesis that the current account is white noise.
7
Three potentially important variables which have not been
incorporated in the VAR model are interest rates, the
nominal exchange rate and the government bUdget deficit. The
reason for excluding the interest rate has been discussed.
We have chosen not to include any exchange rates, since
changes in nominal exchange rates are believed to affect the
current account primarily through changes in real wages or
terms of trade. Inclusion of the (seasonally adjusted)
government budget balance does not significantly improve the
fit of the CA equation (cf. Table C?).
- 201 -
an equation. We can reject the hypotheses that the terms of
trade are not Granger caused by government consumption and that
the wage is not Granger caused by the terms of trade. Apart
from these two cases, however, only lagged values of the
dependent variables themselves have significant explanatory
power. We cannot reject the hypotheses that government
consumption and the current account are exogenous. 8
Some of the results with regard to Granger causality change
when the system is estimated on differenced data (with the
trend excluded). In this case we cannot reject that w is
exogenous; it Granger causes p (marginal significance .001),
whereas p does not seem to Granger cause w (marginal
significance .09). G still Granger causes p, and it remains
that one cannot reject exogeneity of CA (cf. Table C4). These
results were also obtained when the system (in levels) was
estimated using eight lags instead of four, except that in this
case a significant influence from p on w was also found. 9
When only post-1954 or post-1970 data are used, the exogeneity
of p cannot be rejected (cf. Tables C5-6). The exogeneity of G
with respect to w is rejected for the period 1954:2-1985:3, but
not for the periods 1949:2-1969:4 or 1970:1-1985:3. The result
with regard to the exogeneity of the current account is,
however, very stable across different specifications and
variable definitions. 10 In particular, inclusion of the
8
Granger non-causality is a necessary, but not sUfficient,
condition for exogeneity (cf. Cooley and LeRoy (1985».
9
For the VAR model as a whole, it is restrictive to limit the
lag length to four quarters, at least according to the
likelihood ratio test suggested by Sims (1980a, p. 18). It
is only in the terms of trade equation, however, that there
is significant explanatory power attached to the group of
variables with 5-8 lags (cf. Table C3).
10 For instance, CA remains exogenous when w, G, and CA are
normalized by division by industrial production (with no
variables expressed in logarithms, and industrial production
not seasonally adjusted). This normalization could, perhaps,
be motivated as an attempt to transform the original data to
stationary series. Neither does exclusion of the trend from
- 202 -
(seasonally adjusted) government budget balance did not
significantly improve the fit of the CA equation (cf. Table
C7) .
It may be tempting to interpret, e.g., the exogeneity of p in
the post-1970 data set as an indication that Sweden is now a
small open economy, or the exogeneity of CA with respect to the
government bUdget balance as consistent with the "Ricardian
equivalence" hypothesis. As we have not made any structural
assumptions to account for the role of lagged variables we are
not entitled to make such interpretations.
5.3.3
Responses to structural shocks
In interpreting our VAR system via impulse response functions
and variance decompositions we will assume as discussed in
section 5.2.3 that the contemporaneous part of the model is
recursive in the order p - w - G - CA. This assumption allows
us to identify the shocks to the structural model, i.e., the
elements of the u vector. As we have seen from Table 1 that the
stochastic disturbances of the reduced form VAR system ca
W
particularly v P , v , and v
- are correlated, it is clear that
our interpretations may be sensitive to this recursivity
assumption. Modifying the recursive ordering to p - G - w - CA
does not change any of the results markedly.
Let us with this caveat in mind look at Table 3, which displays
our estimates of what corresponds to the non-zero elements of
B of (5.20).11 Our interpretation of this is that a positive
O
terms of trade shock leads the labour unions to revise their
wage demands upwards and that the instantaneous
the VAR model lead to rejection of the exogeneity of CA.
These regressions are not reported.
11 The parameters are estimated from equation (5.22), i.e.,
using the residuals from the estimated VAR system. The
standard errors reported in the table are calculated as
though we had access to the actual values of v. They are
therefore biased.
- 203 -
Harberger-Laursen-Metzler effect is positive. We also see that
the current account is instantaneously improved by a positive
wage shock. This indicates that the negative effect on private
consumption, via employment and production, is strong enough to
outweigh other effects that go in the opposite direction.
Table 3
The contemporaneous model
("standard errors" in parentheses)
vw
t
.3535 v pt
( .0743)
vG
t
.0387 v pt
(.0860)
v tCA=
R2
.1010 v w
t
(.0883)
G
8533 v pt + 9272 v w
t - 1505 v t
(3761)
(3876)
(3592)
R2
R2
.13
.00
.09
DW=2.04
DW=2.08
DW=2.00
The contemporaneous effects in Table 3 are the first steps of
the impulse response functions plotted in Fiaures 2a-d. We see
that the effects of shocks in general are quite persistent; the
24-quarter response is in many cases about as large as that of
the quarter next after the innovation. An exception to this is
the current account equation, where the effects that persist
after a couple of years are negligible relative to the response
within a quarter. Another general feature is that the effects
from shocks to the dependent variable itself are largest in
absolute magnitude over the first year after the shock. Over a
longer horizon the interdepence of the system is strong enough
to make the response to impulses elsewhere in the model more
important.
-
Effects on CA of innovations in p, w, G and CA
Figure 2 a:
1500
1250
204 -
]
\
\
\
1000
\
\
\
750
\
500
\
'vI
f,
250
o
-250
4
2
10
8
6
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
QUARTERS
-ponCA - - - w onCA
---GonCA
- - CA on CA
Effects on G of innovations in p, w, CA and G
Figure 2 b:
0.035
0.030
0.025
0.020
0.015
0.010
0.005
0.000
\
\
\
\
"
/I ''L-
\\
1\
\
\\-1\ ,
/
/
I'"
"
-~.,..---.,.,....----"'----~...",..
- - - -----.
"--~---"--~~~-------------------
-0.005
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
QUARTERS
-nnnl:
---wonG
---CAonG
- - G on G
205 0.04
Figure 2 c:
Effects on w of innovations in p, G, CA and w
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.00
-0.01
-0.02
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
QUARTERS
--ponw ---Gonw ---CAonw
Figure 2 d:
--won w
Effects on p of innovations in CA, w, G and p
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
0.00
-0.01
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
QUARTERS
--wonp ---Gonp
---CAonp
- - p on p
- 206 -
Table 4
Decomposition of Variance
a.
Terms of trade
Innovation to
Quarter
4
8
12
16
24
b.
Quarter
4
8
12
16
24
G
94.5
90.4
84.6
81.9
79.4
3.0
3.8
6.4
7.8
7.2
2.2
4.2
5.6
6.8
9.5
p
w
G
CA
0.2
1.5
3.3
3.4
3.9
27.5
49.2
57.3
57.1
54.0
70.2
41.7
28.3
24.3
20.6
2.0
5.2
9.4
14.2
21.4
CA
0.2
3.9
5.0
4.4
4.0
Government consumption
Innovation to
Quarter
4
8
12
16
24
d.
w
The real wage
Innovation to
c.
p
p
w
1.2
3.9
10.9
15.6
21.8
3.6
4.0
3.6
3.7
5.0
p
w
G
9.5
10.0
10.2
10.3
10.5
5.2
5.8
5.8
5.8
5.8
1.1
1.5
1.7
1.9
2.2
G
93.6
89.7
82.3
77.5
70.1
CA
1.5
2.4
3.2
3.2
3.1
The current account
Innovation to
Quarter
4
8
12
16
24
CA
84.2
82.8
82.3
82.0
81.5
Entries show percentage of forecast error variance of each
variable at different horizons attributable to innovations in
estimated equations associated with each variable.
- 207 -
In Table 4 the innovation accounting results are presented. For
three of the equations own innovations account for more than 70
percent of the forecast error variance even over 24 quarters.
The exception is the wage equation, where terms-of-trade
innovations account for more than half of the variance over
this horizon with wage innovations explaining a mere 20
percent. In forecasting the current account, shocks to other
equations account for less than 20 percent of the variance.
It may be worth pointing out that the dominance of own effects
even in the longer run in terms of innovation accounting, is
not in contrast with the fact that in the long run own effects
are no larger than other effects in the impulse response
graphs. The forecast error at t+k is the combination of long
run impulse responses to innovations close to t and short run
responses to innovations close to t+k. This means that short
run impulse responses are important even for long run forecast
errors. In particular this is so for equations, such as the CA
equation, where the impulse responses are much larger in the
short than in the long run.
Most of the innovation accounting results are stable across
different specifications. Current account innovations regularly
account for around 80 percent of the forecast error variance of
the current account itself, whereas the importance of such
innovations are rather negligible in the other equations. The
main difference when limiting the study to the post 1970 period
is that innovations in the current account gain importance to
the forecast error variances of the other three variables; it
now accounts for 20 per cent of the variance of w. The results
with regard to the wage are more sensitive to model
specification. The result in Table 4 that terms-of-trade
innovations account for the major part of the uncertainty about
the development of the real wage changes drastically when
differenced data are used. In this case innovations to the real
wage itself account for 86 per cent of the 24-quarter horizon
forecast error variance. It should also be mentioned that when
-
208 -
the government budget balance is included in the model, it
accounts for 25 percent of the variance of p, and 51, 22, and 2
percent of the variances of w, G, and CA respectively.
Let us now attempt an interpretation of the impulse response
and innovation accounting patterns depicted in Figures 2a-d and
Table 4. A shock to the current account equation has a strong
short run impact on the current account. This effect vanishes
rather quickly over around two years. The effects on the other
equations are rather negligible. This pattern is consistent
with the interpretation that the current account shock is
mainly a temporary shock to domestic productivity and/or to
world market demand. Such temporary shocks should have little
impact on permanent income and hence on consumption.
Consequently, savings should increase but investment would be
unaltered as the shock is temporary. This implies a temporary
improvement of the current account. One interpretation of the
very small effects on the other equations is that labour unions
and the government correctly understand the shocks to be
temporary, and do not let them affect their policies.
A terms-of-trade shock has an impact on the terms of trade
which remains for a year and a half. To the extent that we
regard p as exogenous this is simply a statement about the
degree of autocorrelation in international prices. Even though
it is a temporary shock to the terms-of-trade equation it is a
lasting shock to the terms of trade as seen from the point of
view of Swedish decision makers. This is the shock with the
largest cross effects in all equations; it accounts for more
than 10 per cent of the variance of CA, 20 per cent of the
variance of G and 50 per cent of the variance of w. The effect
of a terms-of-trade shock on the current account is seen to be
positive and quantitatively not negligible. It is known from
the theoretical literature on the Harberger-Laursen-Metzler
effect that the sign of this effect in general is
indeterminate. Our result indicates that the so called direct
effect not only dominates in the very short run but also over
-
209 -
the longer run with more time for behavioral response and
various sUbstitution effects. The positive effects of uP on w
and G may come about because decision makers correctly perceive
that a terms of trade shock increases wealth. The sign of the
effect on G is not necessarily inconsistent with the hypothesis
of accommodative fiscal policy (according to which a negative
terms-of-trade shock would lead to an increase in government
consumption); after five quarters the wage "overshoots" the
terms-of-trade, and this is when the effect on G turns
positive.
Wage shocks typically have smaller long run effects than
terms-of-trade shocks. Certainly they appear less important
than commonly perceived in the Swedish debate. They are of
limited importance even to the forecast error with regard to
the wage level itself (except in the very short run), which
indicates that labour unions have a limited influence on real
wages. The effect on the current account is positive in both
the short and the long run. One interpretation of this is that
a wage shock has an immediate negative effect on consumption
and thereby a positive effect on exports which is larger than
the negative effect on production. The impact of a wage shock
on government consumption is positive (with the exception of
the instantaneous effect in the first quarter), which is
consistent with an accommodative fiscal policy.
Shocks to government consumption have long run effects on the
current account which are comparable to those of terms of trade
and wage shocks. Innovations to government consumption account
for only 2 per cent of the forecast error variance for the
current account, but for one fifth of the variance in the case
of the real wage. This may reflect, e.g., that an expansive
fiscal policy, which increases employment in the pUblic sector,
leads to more aggressive wage demands from the labour unions,
but in the absence of a deep structural model with assumptions
about the expectations formation of different groups, we
cannnot discriminate between this and other possible
- 210 -
interpretations.
Our finding of a negligible effect from innovations in
government consumption on the current account may be contrasted
with the study by Ahmed (1987) of government spending and the
balance of trade in Britain between 1732 and 1913. Decomposing
government spending into one permanent and one transitory part,
he finds negative effects on the balance of trade from
increases in both components, with transitory shocks exerting a
larger influence. He also finds insignificant effects from
adding the government bUdget deficit to the list of explanatory
variables, which he interprets as consistent with the
"Ricardian equivalence" hypothesis.
To use our results for pOlicy analysis is
treacherous exercise, in view of the weak
have been imposed on the estimated model.
conclude this section with a few comments
for economic policy.
of course a
restrictions that
Let us, nevertheless,
on their relevance
since G is the only pOlicy variable included in the model it is
really only fiscal pOlicy that we are entitled to make
statements about. As we have seen fiscal policy surprises
appear to have rather limited effects. The most important
effect is on the long run development of the real wage, even if
their contribution is smaller than that of terms of trade
shocks (cf. Figure 2c). The relative importance of fiscal
policy (in terms of innovation accounting) is larger if shocks
to the government budget balance are considered, but in neither
case do policy shocks (or supply shocks) matter as far as the
current account is concerned.
It is often said that policy measures undertaken in order to
improve the current account are successful only to the extent
that they affect real wages and the relation between the prices
of domestic and foreign products. Our study gives mixed results
with regard to the small open economy hypothesis of exogenous
- 211 -
terms of trade; whether it is rejected or not depends on the
sample period under study, and the terms of trade equation
shows signs of parameter instability. Let us assume that p is
exogenous with respect to the nominal exchange rate. It may
then make sense to view a devaluation as a negative real wage
shock, which we have seen has a slight negative impact on the
current account.
5.4
CONCLUDING COMMENTS
The aim of the research presented in this chapter is to
contribute to the understanding of the role played by different
factors in determining the current account. In particular we
have aimed at distinguishing between domestic wage shocks,
international terms of trade shocks, and policy shocks to
government consumption.
Vector autoregression methods offer a way to study patterns in
time series data with a limited amount of a priori restrictions
from economic theory. Nevertheless such restrictions must
necessarily be entered at a couple of stages of the work. Since
many early studies using vector autoregression methods have,
rightly, been sUbjected to the critique of drawing structural
conclusions without being explicit about the structural
assumptions made, we should stress the role played by such
assumptions in the present study.
One critical aspect is the choice of variables to include. The
relevant theory mentioned in the introduction certainly
suggests that the variables actually included should be of
central importance. It would nevertheless be of interest to
investigate the sensitivity of the main results to the
inclusion of one or more monetary aggregates and/or interest
rates. The inclusion of an interest rate is, e.g., known to
affect results on money-income causation; see sims (1980b).
Given that it plays such an important role in intertemporal
theories of the current account, its omission from the present
- 212 -
study is a potentially serious problem. It may also be of
interest to investigate a system where savings and investment
(or exports and imports) enter separately rather than just the
balance between them. Such an approach might also contribute to
resolving the Feldstein and Horioka (1980) puzzle of high
correlation of domestic savings and investment rates.
It has been a main theme in the paper that the
orthogonalization underlying the impulse response functions and
the associated innovation accounting reflects structural
assumptions about the contemporaneous relations between the
variables. The recursive structure of the Bo matrix assumed
here presumes among other things that international prices may
be taken to be predetermined at a quarterly basis. Even if we
regard this as a sensible assumption it is essential to
investigate the sensitivity of the main results to alternative
assumptions to identify the BO matrix.
Keeping in mind that much sensitivity analysis of the type
mentioned above remains to be done, there is one "negative"
conclusion to be drawn from this study: the variance of neither
terms of trade shocks, nor wage shocks nor government
consumption shocks explain more than a small fraction of the
variance of the current account. This casts doubt on much of
the debate, at least in Sweden, on these issues. Instead it
suggests that other shocks are the dominant sources of current
account variations.
Related to the innovation accounting results is the finding
that we cannot reject the hypothesis that the current account
is not Granger caused by other variables. Similar results have
also been reached by Backus (1986) with regard to the Canadian
trade balance. These time series patterns are somewhat
reminiscent of the random-walk hypothesis of consumption
associated with the work of Hall (1978), since the current
account is income minus consumption minus investment. In future
work it may be interesting to relate our result to explicitly
- 213 -
stochastic dynamic equilibrium models. One example of such a
model is that of Clarida (1986b), where the current account
reflects consumption smoothing in response to random
productivity shocks, the only shock present in the model. It is
found, however, that the current account cannot be represented
as a Markov process; the current account in t+1 is a function
not only of the current account in t but also of the
productivity shock in t. It should be interesting to augment
this type of model to including at least two different shocks.
- 214 -
Appendix A:
Data description
The data series described in Figures 1a-d are defined as
follows. The terms of trade are defined as the ratio between
the export and import price indices (for total exports and
imports of commodities). The real wage is the index for labor
costs in the industrial sector, divided by the import price
index. Wage and price indices refer to the middle month of each
quarter. The terms of trade, wage and import price series have
been normalized to be around 1.0 in 1947. In the regression
analyses (as well as in Figures 1c-d) logarithms of terms of
trade and real wages have been used. The current account
figures are the current account balance in current prices,
divided by the import price index. Before 1970, no quarterly
data on the current account were available, so we have been
forced to use the quarterly commodity trade balance figures
instead. To these were added 25 % of the annual service account
balance (incl. net interest payments and other transfers from
the rest of the world). The government consumption figures are
the deflated data given by the national accounts (with 1980 as
the base year). Again, no quarterly figures exist before 1970.
The annual figures for earlier years were therefore split on
quarters according to the pattern of central government
outlays. The government consumption data in Figure 1b (Which
have also been used in the regressions) are expressed in
logarithms.
The government budget balance (GB), referred to in section
5.3.2 and Table C7, is defined as the decrease in government
debt. The series has been seasonally adjusted in the same way
as G and CA (cf. appendix B). The industrial production series
mentioned in note 10 is simply the industrial production index.
Most of the data have been obtained from statistics Sweden (the
Central Bureau of Statistics). Monthly data on export and
import prices, wages, industrial production, commodity trade,
- 215 -
government debt, and central government outlays, are published
in the Monthly Digest of Swedish statistics ("Allman
manadsstatistik"i "Kommersiella meddelanden" until the middle
of the 1960's). The government consumption data are taken from
the national accounts (e.g., "BNP kvartal 1985:3").The current
account data have been obtained from the Central Bank of
Sweden.
- 216 -
Appendix B:
Deseasonalization
In this appendix we describe the procedure that has been used
to eliminate the seasonal components of the current account and
government consumption series. Let the vectors of observations
be denoted by CA and G, respectively. The following regressions
were estimated by OLS:
4
4
l
i=l
G
t.a.
+
l. l.
4
CA
where tl
l
i=l
c
G
4
l
i=l
t.'l. +
l.
l.
l
i=l
2 i , 3i,
= [Ii,
Q.o.
+
l. l.
c
CA
, Nil, N being the number of
observations, and Qi = [1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0 ••• 0], Q2 = [0, 1, 0,
0, 0, 1, 0 ••• 0], etc. The seasonal components for government
consumption were defined as
A.
g.
J
f3. J
Ii
"'-
where Ii is the average value of the f3js, the OLS estimate of
the ~~s. The seasonally adjusted data for G were then obtained
J
4
by sUbtracting
I Q.g. from G. The current account data were
i=l l. l.
adjusted in the same way. This method of adjustment follows
Johnston (1972).
The seasonal adjustments were made before data were transformed
to logarithms, and separate sets of seasonal components were
calculated for the periods 1947:2 - 1969:4 and 1970:1 - 1985:3.
- 217 -
The seasonal components are given in the table below.
1947:2 - 1969:4
1970:1 - 1985:3
g.
ca.
-973
1424
-58
1589
347
2080
938
3
-811
271
-6064
-916
4
24
355
2560
38
gi
ca.
1
-802
2
1.
1.
1.
i
- 218 Appendix C:
Tables
Table C 1
Tests for autoregressive unit roots
A
T
k
Terms of
trade
145
8
0.023
2.45
Real
wages
145
8
0.014
1.63
Government 145
consumption
8
0.0002
0.00
145
8
287.4
0.99
Series
Current
account
A
t(~)
s(u)
-0.0003
DW
-2.75
0.88
-2.59
0.032
2.06
0.20
0.99
-0.55
0.036
1.97
-0.0002
-0.29
1.00
0.07
0.032
2.02
-5.10
-1.49
0.76
-2.40 1393.0
1.98
0.ססOO5
A
and
t(~)
are the ratios of the OLS estimates of
~
and
~
to their respective
A
standard errors. T(P1)
is the ratio of P -1 to its standard error. The critical
1
A
value of this statistic is 3.45 for a sample size of 100; see Fuller (1976). s(u)
is the standard error of the regression and DW is the conventional Durbin-Watson
statistic.
- 219 Table C 2
Terms of trade, real wages, government consumption,
and the current account: VAR representation
Dependent variable
(standard errors in parentheses)
Regressors
Pt
wt
Gt
Pt-1
1.09
(0.09)
0.04
(0.09)
-0.09
(0.09)
CAt
2559 (4155)
Pt-2
-0.04
(0.13)
0.23
(0.13)
-0.003
(0.13)
-2272 (6011)
Pt-3
-0.20
(0.13)
--0.22
(0.13)
0.08
(0.13)
-678 (5993)
Pt-4
-0.03
(0.08)
0.18
(0.09)
0.02
(0.09)
144 (4000)
(0.10)
1.09
(0.09)
0.04
(0.09)
3245 (4306)
(0.14)
-0.25
(O.14)
0.14
(0.14)
-4922 (6514)
(0.14)
0.20
(0.14)
-0.14
(0.14)
4793 (6498)
(0.09)
-0.13
(0.09)
0.02
(0.09)
-2847 (4245)
0.14
(0.08)
0.04
(O.08)
0.14
(0.08)
6390 (3560)
wt - 1 -0.09
wt - 2 -0.06
wt - 3
0.13
wt - 4 0.01
G -
t 1
G t 2
G
t
-
G -
3
t 4
CA _
t 1
CA _
t 2
CA _
t 3
CA _
t 4
C
T
Q2
Q3
Q4
0.09
(0.08)
0.16
(O.OS)
0.17
(0.08)
-5665 (3504)
-0.22
(0.08)
-0.08
(0.08)
0.01
(0.08)
-129 (3536)
0.14
(0.07)
0.02
(0.07)
0.48
(0.07)
O. o00ooo7 (0.0ססoo21)
442 (3357)
0.49 (O. 09)
-0.o00ooo5(0.0ססoo22)-0.0ססoo22(0.0ססoo21)-0.0000006(0.0ססoo22)
0.OO2{0.10)
-0.0ססoo15(0.0ססoo23) 0.o00ooo1(0.0ססoo22) 0.0ססoo13(0.0ססoo22)
0.28 (0.10)
0.0ססoo31(0.0ססoo21)-0.0ססoo28(0.0ססoo21)
-1.36
-0.0019
-0.006
0.001
-0.009
Stand. err.
R2
o. o00ooo9 (0.0ססoo20) -0. 0ססoo22( 0.0ססoo20)
(0.92)
(0.OOO9)
(0.009)
(0.009)
(0.009)
0.033
0.911
Q
26.103
(Significance) (0.888)
-1.22
-0.0002
0.01
-0.03
-0.02
(0.90)
(0.0008)
(0.008)
(0.009)
(0.OOO8)
0.0000002{0.0000021)-0.12 (0.10)
1.79
0.001
-0.002
-0.005
-0.005
(0.90) -9257(41461)
(0.0008)-20.8 (39.4)
(0.008)
122 (394)
(0;009)
124 (399)
(0.OO9)
128 (395)
0.032
0.032
1470.4
0.997
16.923
(0.997)
0.995
29.062
(0.787)
0.437
44.306
(0.161)
The definitions of p, W, G, and CA are given in appendix A. C is a constant, T is a
linear trend, and Q2-4 are dummy variables for quarters 2-4. Q is the Box-Pierce
statistic for autocorrelation, and the marginal significance level of the test is
based on the chi-square distribution (36 d.o.f.).
- 220 Table C 3
Tests of Marginal Predictive Power of (8 lags of)
Row Variables for Column Variables
p
w
G
CA
.107
.995
.605
.930
p
.()()()
w
.014
.()()()
.()()()
G
.004
.088
.()()()
.928
CA
.161
.532
.482
.000
R2
.935
.997
.995
.440
19.274
11.095
30.967
27.052
(Significance)
.990
.999
.707
.859
Marg. sign. of
lags 5-8
.000
.148
.147
.378
Q
- 221 Table C 4
Tests of Marginal Predictive Power of (4 lags of)
Row Variables for Column Variables
P - P- 1
w-w-1
G - G-1
CA - CA_
P - P- 1
.082
.087
.147
.980
w- w
-1
.001
.010
.077
.894
G-G-1
.004
.126
.000
.312
.658
.839
.766
.000
.198
.225
.516
.117
34.450
17.334
24.488
53.434
.542
.996
.927
.031
CA - CA_
1
R2
Q
(Significance)
1
- 222 -
Table C 5
Tests of Marginal Predictive Power of (4 lags of)
Row Variables for Column Variables
a.
Estimation period 1949:2 - 1969:4
p
w
G
p
.000
.019
.663
.638
w
.003
.000
.676
.873
G
.033
.636
.050
.695
CA
.025
.057
.899
.239
R2
.824
.996
.981
.026
18.907
18.599
12.936
10.266
.873
.884
.990
.998
Q
(Significance)
b.
CA
Estimation period 1970:1 - 1985:3
p
w
G
p
.000
.049
.292
.518
w
.440
.000
.292
.824
G
.297
.843
.000
.407
CA
.782
.592
.201
.001
R2
.964
.872
.985
.438
28.144
10.136
17.848
20.276
.136
.977
.659
.504
Q
(Significance)
CA
- 223 Table C 6
Tests of Marginal Predictive Power of (4 lags of)
Row Variables for Column Variables
Estimation period 1954:2 - 1985:3
p
w
G
CA
p
.000
.104
.147
.431
w
.781
.000
.014
.670
G
.693
.557
.000
.356
CA
.705
.441
.716
.000
r
.967
.996
.995
.443
Q
29.403
21.580
42.320
41.727
.647
.936
.128
.142
(Significance)
- 224 Table C 7
Tests of Marginal Predictive Power of (4 lags of)
Row Variables for Column Variables
p
w
G
GB
CA
p
.000
.038
.386
.928
.909
w
.005
.000
.306
.199
.856
G
.001
.174
.000
.652
.233
GB
.000
.007
.464
.000
.897
CA
.737
.071
.828
.047
.000
R2
.925
.997
.995
.832
.424
34.456
19.861
28.615
33.711
43.899
.542
.986
.804
.578
.172
Q
(Significance)
- 225 -
REFERENCES
Ahmed, S. (1987), "Government Spending, the Balance of Trade
and the Terms of Trade in British History", Journal of
Monetary Economics, Vol. 20, pp. 195-220.
Backus, D. (1986), "The Canadian-U.S. Exchange Rate: Evidence
from a Vector Autoregression", Review of Economics and
statistics, Vol. 68, pp. 628-637.
Bernanke, B.S. (1986), "Alternative Explanations of the
Money-Income Correlation", Carnegie Rochester Conference
Series on Public Policy, Vol. 25, pp. 49-100.
Blanchard, O.J. (1986), "Empirical Structural Evidence on
Wages, Prices, and Employment in the U.S.", NBER Working
Paper No. 2044.
Blanchard, O.J. and M. Watson (1986), "Are Business Cycles All
Alike?", in R. Gordon, ed., Business Cycles: Continuity
and Change, NBERjUniversity of Chicago Press, Chicago,
pp. 123-179.
Bosworth, B.P. and A.M. Rivlin, (1987), eds., The Swedish
Economy, the Brookings Institution, Washington D.C.
Calmfors, L. and H. Horn (1986), "Employment Policies and
Centralized Wage-setting", Economica, Vol. 53, pp.
281-302.
Clarida, R.H. (1986a), "International Lending and Borrowing in
a Stochastic Sequence Equilibrium", NBER Working Paper No.
1944.
Clarida, R.H. (1986b), "The Balance of Payments Adjustment
Mechanism in a Rational Expectations Equilibrium", NBER
Working Paper No. 1945.
Cooley, T.F. and S.F. LeRoy (1985), "Atheoretical
Macroeconometrics. A Critique", Journal of Monetary
Economics, Vol. 16, pp. 283-308.
Engle, R.F. (1987) "On the Theory of Cointegrated Economic Time
series, 1987" mimeo, University of California, San Diego.
Engle, R.F. and C.W.J. Granger (1987), "Co-integration and
Error Correction: Representation, Estimation, and
Testing", Econometrica, Vol. 55, pp. 251-276.
Engle, R.F. and B.S. Yoo (1987), "Forecasting and Testing in
Co-Integrated Systems", Journal of Econometrics, Vol. 35,
pp. 143-159.
-- 226 -
Feldstein, M. and C. Horioka (1980), "Domestic Savings and
International Capital Flows", Economic Journal, Vol. 90,
pp. 314-329.
Fuller, W.A. (1976), Introduction to statistical Time series,
Wiley, New York.
Hall, R.E. (1978), "Stochastic Implications of the Life-Cycle
Permanent Income Hypothesis: Theory and Evidence", Journal
of Political Economy, Vol. 86, pp. 971-1007.
Heikensten, L. and E. Asbrink (1986), "Currency Flows in 1985
and Swedish Economic Policy", Skandinaviska Enskilda
Banken Quarterly Review 1/1986, pp. 21-28.
Johnston, J. (1972), Econometric Methods, 2nd ed, McGraw-Hill,
New York.
Lindbeck, A.
London.
(1975), Swedish Economic Policy, Macmillan,
Lundberg, E. (1985), "The Rise and Fall of the Swedish Model",
Journal of Economic Literature, Vol. 23, pp. 1-36.
Nelson C.R. and C.J. Plosser (1982), "Trends and Random Walks
in Macroeconomic Time Series", Journal of Monetary
Economics, Vol. 10, pp. 139-162.
Obstfeld, M. (1982), "Aggregate Spending and the Terms of
Trade: Is There a Laursen-Metzler Effect?", Quarterly
Journal of Economics, Vol. 97, pp. 251-270.
Persson, T. and L.E.O. Svensson (1985), "Current Account
Dynamics and the Terms of Trade: Harberger-Laursen-Metzler
Two Generations Later", Journal of Political Economy, Vol.
93, pp. 43-65.
Persson, T. and L.E.O. Svensson (1987), New Methods in the
Swedish Medium-Term Survey, Supplement no. 3 to the 1987
Medium-Term Survey, Allmanna Forlaget, Stockholm.
Razin, A. (1984), "Capital Movements, Intersectoral Resource
Shifts and the Trade Balance", European Economic Review,
Vol. 26, pp. 135-152.
Sachs, J. (1981), "The Current Account and Macroeconomic
Adjustment in the 1970's", Brookings Papers on Economic
Activity, pp. 202-268.
Sachs, J. (1982), "The Current Account in the Macroeconomic
Adjustment Process", Scandinavian Journal of Economics,
Vol. 84, pp. 147-159.
Sims, C.A. (1980a), "Macroeconomics and Reality", Econometrica,
Vol. 48, pp. 1-48.
~
227
~
Sims, C.A. (1980b), "Comparison of Interwar and Postwar
Business Cycles: Monetarism Reconsidered", American
Economic Review Papers and Proceedings, Vol. 70 (May
1980), pp. 250-257.
Sims, C.A. (1986), "Are Forecasting Models Usable for Policy
Analysis?", Federal Reserve Bank of Minneapolis Quarterly
Review, Vol. 10 (Winter 1986), pp. 2-16.
Sims, C.A., J.Ho stock and M.W. Watson (1987), "Inference in
Linear Time Series Models with Some unit Roots", Working
Paper E~87-1, The Hoover Institution.
Summers, L.R. (1987), "Tax Policy and International
Competitiveness", in Frenkel, ed., International Aspects
of Fiscal Policies, NBERjUniversity of Chicago Press,
Chicago.
Svensson, L.E.O. (1984), nail Prices, Welfare, and the Trade
Balance", Quarterly Journal of Economics, Vol. 99, pp.
649-672.
Svensson, L.E.O. and A. Razin (1983), "The Terms of Trade and
the Current Account: The Harberger-Laursen-Metzler
Effect", Journal of Political Economy, Vol. 91, pp.
97-125.
Soderstrom, H.T. (1984), "Imbalances in the Swedish Economy
from a Financial Perspective", Skandinaviska Enskilda
Banken Quarterly Review, 2/1984, pp. 44-54.
Soderstrom, H.T. and S. viotti (1979), "Money Wage Disturbances
and the Endogeneity of the Public Sector in an Open
Economy", in Lindbeck, ed., Inflation and Employment in
Open Economies, North~Holland, Amsterdam, ppc 71~98.
- 229 -
Reports published by EFI since 1985
Unless otherwise indicated, these reports are published in English.
1985
BERGSTROM,
c.,
Supply Disruptions and the Allocation of Emergency Reserves.
BOJO, J., HDLTCRANTZ, L., Cost Benefit Analysis of Multiple Dse of Mountain
Forests. Research Report. 1)
BROSTROM, K., HOLMLOV, P G., Innovation Transfer. Preliminary Study no 2.
Two case studies. Mimeographed. 1)
BRDNSSON, N., The Irrational Organization. Irrationality as a Basis for
Organizational Action and Change. John Wiley and Sons.
CZARNIAWSKA, B., Public Sector Executives: Managers or Politicians? Research
Report.
DOCHERTY, P., WERNGREN, C., WIDMAN, A., Information Technology and Business
Development. 1)
FORSS, K., Planning and Evaluation in Aid Organizations. IIB/EFI
HOLMLOV, P G., HANS~N, L., Product Testing and Evaluation. An overview of
issues and practises, with an annotated bibliography.
HORNGREN, L., Swedish Monetary Policy: A review. Research Report.
KARLSTROM, D., Economic Growth and Migration During the Industrialization
of Sweden.
KARLSSON, A., MYRBERG, D., Investment Company Discounts - a Valuation
Phenomenon? Research Report. 1)
KYLEN,B., Managing Interruption Losses - Economic Risk Analysis - Before
Deliveries Cease. Research Report 1)
LARSSON, B., Ownership and Governance in Company-Group Organizations.
R~search Report. 1)
LINDGREN, R., On Capital Formation and the Effects of Capital Income
Taxation.
LUNDGREN, A., BROMAN, M,. Management Theory in Cooperative Organizations. 1)
LUNDGREN, S., Model Integration and the Economics of Nuclear Power.
Mufindi-project, working papers:
7: RUDENGREN, J., Methods of Socia-Economic Impact Assessment
8: ASHUVUD, J., Potential Ecological Effects of the Southern Paper
Mills.
1) Published in Swedish only
2) Published in Swedish with a summary in English
- 230 -
9: CHRISTIANSSON, C.,
cal Ecosystem.
ASHUVUD, J., Heavy Industry in a Rural Tropi-
MYHRMAN, J., (ed) Future Perspectives of Swedish Credit Markets. 1)
MALER, K-G., Economic Consequences of Different Automobile Exhaust Control
Strategies in Sweden. Research Report 1)
WALLSTEN, L., Contingent-Price Corporate Acquisitions. 2)
1986
ALBERT, L., FREDRIKSSON, 0., Increasing Efficiency and Effectiveness in the
Swedish Flooring Industry. 1)
ASPLING, A., Power an Influence in Organizations - an investigation and
evaluation of the consequences of a Swedish labour legislation.
BJORKEGREN, D., Executive Training - a case study. 2)
BRYTTING, T., LOWSTEDT, J., Freedom in Organizing - it does exist! 1)
HAMMARKVIST, K-O., Distribution Systems in Transition - some thoughts concerning information technology and efficiency.
HOLMBERG, I., The Executive Mandate - a presidential mission begins.
EFI/Studentlitteratur. 2)
HORNGREN, L., On Monetary Policy and Interest Rate Determination in an open
economy.
HORNGREN, L. VREDIN, A., The Foreign Exchange Risk Premium: A review and
some evidence from a currency basket system. Research Report.
KRUSELL, P., The Demand for Money in Sweden 1970 -
1983. Research Report.
LUNDGREN, A., Actions and Structures - an organizational theory study of the
boards of directors in large companies. 2)
LOWSTEDT, J., Automation or Knowledge Production? 1)
ROMBACH, B., Rationalization or Talk. Municipal adaption to a stagnant
economy. Doxa Ekonomi. 2)
RYDQVIST, K., The Pricing of Shares with Different Voting Power and the
Theory of Oceanic Games.
THIMREN, C., Imperfectly Competitive Markets for Exhaustible Resources - a
gametheoretic approach. Research Report.
VESTLUND, A., TORNKVIST, B., On the Identification of Time for Structural
Changes by Mosumsq and Cusumsq Procedures. Research Report.
1) Published in Swedish only
2) Published in Swedish with a summary in English
-
231
-
1987
ANDERSSON, T., TERNSTROM, B o , Private Foreign Investments and Welfare
Effects: A Comparative Study of Five Countries in Southeast Asia. Research
Report
ANDERSSON, To, TERNSTROM, B o , External Capital and Social Welfare in Southeast Asiao Research Report
BENNDORF, H., Marketing Planning between Companies in Industrial Systems. 2)
BERGMAN, L o , MALER, K-G., STAHL, I.,BERGMAN, LO l LUNDGREN, S., General Equilibrium Context: A Survey of Modelling Approaches. Research Report 1)
BJORKEGREN, D., Towards a Cognitive Theory of Organizations. Research Report 1)
BJORKEGREN, Do, Organizational Thinking and Organizational Learning. Research
Report 1)
CLAESSON, K., The Efficiency of the Stockholm Stock Exchange. 2)
DAVIDSSON; P., Growth Willingness in Small Firms. Entrepreneurship - and
after. Research Report
ENGSHAGEN, I., Financial Ratios Based on Consolidated vs. Non-Consolidated
Statements - An Analysis from a Management Control Perspective. Research Report1)
FREDRIKSSON, 0., HOLMLOV, P.G., JULANDER, C-R., Distribution of Goods and
Services in the Information Age. 1)
HAGSTEDT, Po, Sponsoring - More than Marketing. EFI/MTC
1)
JARNHALL, B., On the Formulation and Estimation of Models of Open Economies.
Research Report
KYLEN, Bo , Economics of Digital Mapping
0
Models for Strategic Choices. 1)
LUNDGREN, S., Pricing of Electricity: Principles and Current Practise.
Research Report 1)
SWARTZ, E., The Concept of the Federative Organization: A Theoretical,
Legal, and Empirical Perspectiveo Research Report 1)
WAHL, A., Some Different Views on Partriarchy. Research Report 1)
WESTLUND, A.H., OHLEN, S., Business Cycle Forecasting in Sweden; A Problem
Analysis. Research Report
1) Published in Swedish only
2) Published in Swedish with a summary in English